P. 1
aspencurso

aspencurso

|Views: 348|Likes:
Publicado porKa El

More info:

Published by: Ka El on Feb 10, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

04/18/2013

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Contact Information
  • Course Agenda - Day 1
  • Course Agenda - Day 2
  • Course Agenda - Day 3
  • Additional Topics
  • Additional Topics (Continued)
  • Appendices
  • Introduction
  • Advantages of Simulation
  • General Simulation Problem
  • Good Flowsheeting Practice
  • Important Features of Aspen Plus
  • The User Interface
  • Cumene Flowsheet Definition
  • Graphic Flowsheet Operations
  • Automatic Naming of Streams and Blocks
  • Benzene Flowsheet Definition Workshop
  • Basic Input
  • The Data Browser
  • Help
  • Status Indicators
  • Cumene Production Conditions
  • Setup
  • Setup Specifications Form
  • Stream Report Options
  • Setup Run Types
  • Components Specifications Form
  • Entering Components
  • Find
  • Pure Component Databanks
  • Properties Specifications Form
  • Streams Input Form
  • Blocks
  • Block Form
  • Control Panel
  • Reviewing Results
  • Benzene Flowsheet Conditions Workshop
  • Unit Operation Model Types
  • Mixers/Splitters
  • Separators
  • Heat Exchangers
  • Columns - Shortcut
  • Columns - Rigorous
  • Reactors
  • Pressure Changers
  • Manipulators
  • Solids
  • User Models
  • Subflowsheets
  • Model Templating
  • Model Templating (Continued)
  • RadFrac
  • RadFrac Flowsheet Connectivity
  • RadFrac Setup Configuration Sheet
  • RadFrac Setup Streams Sheet
  • Feed Convention
  • RadFrac Setup Pressure Sheet
  • Methanol-Water RadFrac Column
  • Plot Wizard
  • Plot Wizard Demonstration
  • RadFrac Convergence Problems
  • RadFrac Convergence Problems (Continued)
  • RadFrac Workshop
  • RadFrac Workshop (Continued)
  • Reactor Models
  • Reactor Overview
  • Balanced Based Reactors •RYield
  • Balanced Based Reactors (Continued) •RStoic
  • Equilibrium Based Reactors •GENERAL
  • Equilibrium Based Reactors (Continued) •RGibbs
  • Using a Reaction ID
  • Power-law Rate Expression
  • Reactor Workshop
  • Reactor Workshop (Continued)
  • Cyclohexane Production Workshop
  • Physical Properties
  • How to Establish Physical Properties
  • Physical Property Models
  • Comparison of EOS and Activity Models
  • Common Property Methods
  • Choosing a Property Method - Review
  • Choosing a Property Method - Example
  • Binary Parameters
  • Displaying Property Parameters
  • Reporting Physical Property Parameters
  • Parameter Reports
  • Property Analysis - Common Plots
  • Additional Data from DETHERM
  • Interface to the DETHERM Databank
  • Establishing Physical Properties - Review
  • Properties included in Prop-Sets
  • Predefined Property Sets
  • Stream Results Options
  • Physical Properties Workshop
  • Physical Properties Workshop (Continued)
  • Accessing Variables
  • Why Access Variables?
  • Variable Categories
  • Variable Definition Dialog Box
  • Notes
  • Sensitivity Analysis
  • Sensitivity Analysis Example
  • Sensitivity Analysis Results
  • Uses of Sensitivity Analysis
  • Steps for Using Sensitivity Analysis
  • Plotting
  • Sensitivity Analysis Workshop
  • Design Specifications
  • Design Specification Example
  • Steps for Using Design Specifications
  • Steps for Using Design Specifications (Continued)
  • Design Specification Workshop
  • Fortran Blocks
  • Fortran Block Example
  • Fortran Block Example (Continued)
  • Fortran Interpreter
  • Built-In Fortran Functions
  • Statements Requiring Compilation
  • Steps for Using Fortran Blocks
  • Fortran Workshop
  • Fortran Workshop (Continued)
  • Windows Interoperability
  • Benefits of Windows Interoperability
  • Steps for Using Copy and Paste
  • OLE Embedding
  • OLE Embedding (Continued)
  • Embedding Objects in the Flowsheet
  • Copy and Paste Workshop 1
  • Copy and Paste Workshop 2
  • Creating Active Links
  • Steps for Creating Active Links
  • Paste Link Demonstration
  • Paste Link Workshop
  • Saving Files with Active Links
  • Running Files with Active Links
  • ActiveX Automation
  • OLE Automation (Continued)
  • OLE Automation Demonstration
  • Visual Basic Examples
  • Heat Exchanger Blocks
  • Working with the Heater Model
  • Heater Input Specifications
  • Heater Input Specifications (Continued)
  • Heat Streams
  • Working with the HeatX Model
  • HeatX Input Specifications
  • Working with the MHeatX Model
  • HeatX versus Heater
  • Two Heaters versus One HeatX
  • Working with Hetran and Aerotran
  • Heat Curves
  • Heat Curves Tabular Results
  • Heat Curve Plot
  • HeatX Workshop
  • Pressure Changer Blocks
  • Working with the Pump Model
  • Pump Performance Curves
  • Working with the Compr Model
  • Working with the MCompr Model
  • Compressor Performance Curves
  • Work Streams
  • Working with the Valve Model
  • Working with the Valve Model (Continued)
  • Working with the Pipe Model
  • Pressure Changers Block Example
  • Pressure Changers Workshop
  • Pressure Changers Workshop (Continued)
  • Flowsheet Convergence
  • Convergence Block Types
  • Reconciling Streams
  • Convergence Workshop
  • Convergence Workshop (Continued)
  • Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop
  • Part 1: Front-End Section
  • Part 1: Front-End Section Check
  • Part 2: Heat Recovery Section
  • Part 2: Heat Recovery Section (Continued)
  • Part 2: Heat Recovery Section Check
  • Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section
  • Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section (Continued)
  • Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section Check
  • Part 4: Distillation Section
  • Part 4: Distillation Section Check
  • Part 5: Furnace Section
  • Part 5: Furnace Section (Continued)
  • Maintaining Aspen Plus Simulations
  • File Formats in Aspen Plus
  • File Type Characteristics
  • How to Store a Simulation
  • Template Files
  • How to Create a Personal Template
  • Maintaining Your Computer
  • Maintaining Your Hard Disk
  • Customizing the Look of Your Flowsheet
  • Customizing the Process Flow Diagram •Add annotations
  • Viewing
  • Adding Annotation
  • Example of a Stream Table
  • Adding Global Data
  • Using PFD Mode
  • Examples of When to Use PFD Mode
  • Annotation Workshop
  • Estimation of Physical Properties
  • What is Property Estimation?
  • Estimation Methods and Requirements
  • Steps For Using Property Estimation
  • Defining Molecular Structure
  • Steps For Defining General Structure
  • Example of Entering Additional Data
  • Property Estimation Workshop
  • Property Estimation Workshop (Continued)
  • Electrolytes
  • Electrolytes Examples
  • Characteristics of an Electrolyte System
  • Types of Components
  • Types of Components (Continued)
  • Apparent and True Components
  • Apparent and True Components Example
  • Electrolyte Wizard
  • Electrolyte Wizard (Continued)
  • Simplifying the Chemistry
  • Limitations of Electrolytes
  • Limitations of Electrolytes (Continued)
  • Electrolyte Demonstration
  • Steps for Using Electrolytes
  • Electrolyte Workshop
  • Sour Water Stripper Workshop
  • Solids Handling
  • Classes of Components
  • Specifying Component Type
  • Conventional Components
  • Conventional Inert Solids (CI Solids)
  • Nonconventional Solids (NC Solids)
  • Component Attributes
  • Component Attribute Descriptions
  • Solid Properties
  • Solids Properties - Nonconventional Solids
  • Solids Properties - Special Models for Coal
  • Built-in Material Stream Classes
  • Unit Operation Models
  • Solids Workshop 1
  • Solids Workshop 1 (Continued)
  • Solids Workshop 2
  • Optimization
  • Optimization Example
  • Steps for Using Optimization
  • Steps for Using Optimization (Continued)
  • Optimization Workshop
  • Optimization Workshop (Continued)
  • RadFrac Convergence
  • RadFrac Convergence Methods
  • Convergence Methods (Continued)
  • RadFrac Convergence Algorithms
  • Standard Algorithm
  • Standard Algorithm (Continued)
  • Sum-Rates Algorithm
  • Nonideal Algorithm
  • Newton Algorithm
  • Vapor-Liquid-Liquid Calculations
  • Convergence Method Selection
  • Convergence Method Selection (Continued)
  • RadFrac Initialization Method
  • Specialized Initialization Methods
  • Estimates
  • Composition Estimates
  • RadFrac Convergence Workshop
  • Vinyl Chloride Monomer (VCM) Workshop
  • VCM Workshop
  • Capabilities of Automation
  • Aspen Plus Simulation File
  • Automation Demonstration 1
  • Steps to Create Workbook
  • Setup Excel for VBA Programming
  • Select Reference to Aspen Plus
  • Place/Modify Controls (1 of 6)
  • Place/Modify Controls (2 of 6)
  • Place/Modify Controls (3 of 6)
  • Place/Modify Controls (4 of 6)
  • Place/Modify Controls (5 of 6)
  • Place/Modify Controls (6 of 6)
  • Add Additional Text to Workbook (1 of 2)
  • Add Additional Text to Workbook (2 of 2)
  • General Declarations
  • Code Subroutine
  • Code Control Events (2 of 4)
  • Code Control Events (3 of 4)
  • Code Control Events (4 of 4)
  • Code Workbook_BeforeCloseEvent (1 of 2)
  • Code Workbook_BeforeCloseEvent (2 of 2)
  • Demonstration of Input/Output
  • Aspen Plus Variable Explorer (1 of 2)
  • Aspen Plus Variable Explorer (2 of 2)
  • Code Subroutines
  • Modify Run Button Code
  • Automation Workshop
  • Workshop Answer (1 of 2)
  • Workshop Answer (2 of 2)

©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 1 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Aspen Technology, Inc.
Based on Aspen Plus
®
10.1
December 1999
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Potential
Reach Your
True
Introduction to
Aspen Plus
®
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 2 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Contact Information
• Phone: 888-996-7001 or 617-949-1021
• Email: support@aspentech.com
• Internet: http://www.aspentech.com
- Technical Support Hotline
- Training
(Contact: Pat Sylvia)
- Customized Support Services
(Contact: Andrea Orchanian)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 3 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Course Agenda - Day 1
1. Introduction - General Simulation Concepts
2. The User Interface - Graphical Flowsheet Definition
3. Basic Input - Getting Around the Graphical User
Interface
4. Unit Operation Models - Overview of Available Unit
Operations
5. RadFrac - Multistage Separation Model
6. Reactor Models - Overview of Available Reactor Types
7. Cyclohexane Production Workshop
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 4 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Course Agenda - Day 2
8. Physical Properties - Overview of Thermodynamic
Models, Basic Property Analysis and Reporting
9. Accessing Variables - Making References to Flowsheet
Variables
10. Sensitivity Analysis - Studying Relationships Between
Process Variables
11. Design Specifications - Meeting Process Objectives
12. Fortran Blocks - Use of In-Line Fortran
13. Windows Interoperability - Transferring Data to and from
Other Windows Programs
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 5 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Course Agenda - Day 3
14. Heat Exchangers - Heaters and Heat Exchangers
15. Pressure Changers - Pumps, Compressors, Pipes and
Valves
16. Flowsheet Convergence - Convergence Blocks, Tear
Streams and Flowsheet Sequences
17. Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop - Simulate a
Methanol Plant
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 6 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Additional Topics
18. Maintaining Aspen Plus Simulations - Managing Aspen
Plus Files for Storage and Retrieval
19. Customizing the Look of Your Flowsheet - Creating
Process Flow Diagrams
20. Estimation of Physical Properties - Overview of
Property Estimation
21. Electrolytes - Introduction to the Use of Electrolytes
22. Solids Handling - Overview of the Solids Capabilities
23. Optimization - Optimizing a Flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 7 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Additional Topics (Continued)
24. RadFrac Convergence - Techniques for Converging
Difficult Columns
25. VCM Workshop
26. ActiveX Automation
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 8 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Appendices
A. Enthalpy Reference and Heat of Reaction
B. Workshop Instructions
C. Workshop Results
D. Final Workshop Hints
9 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Introduction
Objective:
Introduce general flowsheet simulation concepts and
Aspen Plus features
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 10 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Introduction
• What is flowsheet simulation?
ðUse of a computer program to quantitatively model the
characteristic equations of a chemical process
• Uses underlying physical relationships
- Mass and energy balance
- Equilibrium relationships
- Rate correlations (reaction and mass/heat transfer)
• Predicts
- Stream flowrates, compositions, and properties
- Operating conditions
- Equipment sizes
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 11 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Advantages of Simulation
• Reduces plant design time
- Allows designer to quickly test various plant
configurations
• Helps improve current process
- Answers “what if” questions
- Determines optimal process conditions within given
constraints
- Assists in locating the constraining parts of a process
(debottlenecking)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 12 Introduction to Aspen Plus
General Simulation Problem
What is the composition of stream PRODUCT?
• To solve this problem, we need:
- Material balances
- Energy balances
REACTOR
FEED
RECYCLE
REAC-OUT
COOL
COOL-OUT
SEP
PRODUCT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 13 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Approaches to Flowsheet Simulation
• Sequential Modular
- Aspen Plus is a sequential modular simulation
program.
- Each unit operation block is solved in a certain
sequence.
• Equation Oriented
- Aspen Custom Modeler (formerly SPEEDUP) is an
equation oriented simulation program.
- All equations are solved simultaneously.
• Combination
- Aspen Dynamics (formerly DynaPLUS) uses the
Aspen Plus sequential modular approach to initialize
the steady state simulation and the Aspen Custom
Modeler (formerly SPEEDUP) equation oriented
approach to solve the dynamic simulation.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 14 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Good Flowsheeting Practice
• Build large flowsheets a few blocks at a time.
- This facilitates troubleshooting if errors occur.
• Ensure flowsheet inputs are reasonable.
• Check that results are consistent and realistic.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 15 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Important Features of Aspen Plus
• Rigorous Electrolyte Simulation
• Solids Handling
• Petroleum Handling
• Data Regression
• Data Fit
• Optimization
• User Routines
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 16 Introduction to Aspen Plus
17 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
The User Interface
Objective:
Become comfortable and familiar with the Aspen Plus
graphical user interface
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 1, The User Interface
• User Guide, Chapter 2, Creating a Simulation Model
• User Guide, Chapter 4, Defining the Flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 18 Introduction to Aspen Plus
The User Interface
Reference: Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 1, The User Interface
Run ID
Tool Bar
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Select Mode
button
Model
Library
Model Menu
Tabs
Process
Flowsheet
Window
Next Button
Status Area
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 19 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Cumene Flowsheet Definition
RStoic
Model
Heater
Model
Flash2
Model
Filename: CUMENE.BKP
REACTOR
FEED
RECYCLE
REAC-OUT
COOL
COOL-OUT
SEP
PRODUCT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 20 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Using the Mouse
• Left button click - Select object/field
• Right button click - Bring up menu for
selected object/field,
or inlet/outlet
• Double left click - Open Data Browser object
sheet
Reference: Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 1, The User Interface
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 21 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Graphic Flowsheet Operations
To place a block on the flowsheet:
1. Click on a model category tab in the Model Library.
2. Select a unit operation model. Click the drop-down arrow
to select an icon for the model.
3. Click on the model and then click on the flowsheet to
place the block. You can also click on the model icon
and drag it onto the flowsheet.
4. Click the right mouse button to stop placing blocks.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 22 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Graphic Flowsheet Operations (Continued)
• To place a stream on the flowsheet:
1. Click on the STREAMS icon in the Model Library.
2. If you want to select a different stream type (Material,
Heat or Work), click the down arrow next to the icon and
choose a different type.
3. Click a highlighted port to make the connection.
4. Repeat step 3 to connect the other end of the stream.
5. To place one end of the stream as either a process
flowsheet feed or product, click a blank part of the
Process Flowsheet window.
6. Click the right mouse button to stop creating streams.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 23 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Graphic Flowsheet Operations (Continued)
• To display an Input form for a Block or a Stream in the Data
Browser:
1. Double click the left mouse button on the object of
interest.
• To Rename, Delete, Change the icon, provide input or view
results for a block or stream:
1. Select object (Block or Stream) by clicking on it with the
left mouse button.
2. Click the right mouse button while the pointer is over the
selected object icon to bring up the menu for that object.
3. Choose appropriate menu item.
Reference: Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 4, Defining the Flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 24 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Automatic Naming of Streams and Blocks
• Stream and block names can be automatically
assigned by Aspen Plus or entered by the user when
the object is created.
• Stream and block names can be displayed or hidden.
• To modify the naming options:
- Select Options from the Tools menu.
- Click the Flowsheet tab.
- Check or uncheck the naming options desired.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 25 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Benzene Flowsheet Definition Workshop
Objective: Create a graphical flowsheet
- Start with the General with English Units Template.
- Choose the appropriate icons for the blocks.
- Rename the blocks and streams.
When finished, save in backup
format (Run-ID.BKP).
filename: BENZENE.BKP
FL1
Heater
Model
Flash2
Model
Flash2
Model
COOL
FEED COOL
VAP1
LIQ1
FL2
VAP2
LIQ2
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 26 Introduction to Aspen Plus
27 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Basic Input
Objective:
Introduce the basic input required to run an Aspen Plus
simulation
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 3, Using Aspen Plus Help
• User Guide, Chapter 5, Global Information for Calculations
• User Guide, Chapter 6, Specifying Components
• User Guide, Chapter 7, Physical Property Methods
• User Guide, Chapter 9, Specifying Streams
• User Guide, Chapter 10, Unit Operation Models
• User Guide, Chapter 11, Running Your Simulation
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 28 Introduction to Aspen Plus
The User Interface
Menus
- Used to specify program options and commands
Toolbar
- Allows direct access to certain popular functions
- Can be moved
- Can be hidden or revealed using the Toolbars dialog
box from the View menu
Data Browser
- Can be moved, resized, minimized, maximized or
closed
- Used to navigate the folders, forms, and sheets
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 29 Introduction to Aspen Plus
The User Interface (Continued)
Folders
- Refers to the root items in the Data Browser
- Contain forms
Forms
- Used to enter data and view results for the simulation
- Can be comprised of a number of sheets
- Are located in folders
Sheets
- Make up forms
- Are selected using tabs at the top of each sheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 30 Introduction to Aspen Plus
The User Interface (Continued)
Object Manager
- Allows manipulation of discrete objects of information
- Can be created, edited, renamed, deleted, hidden, and
revealed
Next Button
- Checks if the current form is complete and skips to the
next form which requires input
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 31 Introduction to Aspen Plus
The Data Browser
Menu tree
Previous sheet
Next sheet
Status area
Parent button Units
Go back
Go forward
Comments
Next
Description area
Status
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 32 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Help
• Help Topics
- Contents - Used to browse through the
documentation. The User Guides and Reference
Manuals are all included in the help.
• All of the information in the User Guides is found under
the “Using Aspen Plus” book.
- Index - Used to search for help on a topic using the
index entries
- Find - Used to search for a help on a topic that
includes any word or words
• “What’s This?” Help
- Select “What’s This?” from the Help menu and then
click on any area to get help for that item.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 33 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Functionality of Forms
• When you select a field on a form (click left mouse button
in the field), the prompt area at the bottom of the window
gives you information about that field.
• Click the drop-down arrow in a field to bring up a list of
possible input values for that field.
- Typing a letter will bring up the next selection on the
list that begins with that letter.
• The Tab key will take you to the next field on a form.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 34 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Basic Input
• The minimum required inputs (in addition to the
graphical flowsheet) to run a simulation are:
- Setup
- Components
- Properties
- Streams
- Blocks
• These inputs are all found in folders within the Data
Browser.
• These input folders can be located quickly using the
Data menu or the Data Browser buttons on the toolbar.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 35 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Status Indicators
Symbol Status
Input for the form is incomplete
Input for the form is complete
No input for the form has been entered. It is optional.
Results for the form exist.
Results for the form exist, but there were calculation
errors.
Results for the form exist, but there were calculation
warnings.
Results for the form exist, but input has changed since
the results were generated.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 36 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Cumene Production Conditions
Q = 0 Btu/hr
Pdrop = 0 psi
C6H6 + C3H6 = C9H12
Benzene Propylene Cumene (Isopropylbenzene)
90% Conversion of Propylene
T = 130 F
Pdrop = 0.1 psi
P = 1 atm
Q = 0 Btu/hr
Benzene: 40 lbmol/hr
Propylene: 40 lbmol/hr
T = 220 F
P = 36 psia
Use the RK-SOAVE Property Method
Filename: CUMENE.BKP
REACTOR
FEED
RECYCLE
REAC-OUT
COOL
COOL-OUT
SEP
PRODUCT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 37 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Setup
Most of the commonly used Setup information is entered on
the Setup Specifications Global sheet:
• Flowsheet title to be used on reports
• Run type
• Input and output units
• Valid phases (e.g. vapor-liquid or vapor-liquid-liquid)
• Ambient pressure
Stream report options are located on the Setup Report
Options Stream sheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 38 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Setup Specifications Form
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 39 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Stream Report Options
Stream report options are located on the Setup Report
Options Stream sheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 40 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Setup Run Types
Run Type
Flowsheet
Standard Aspen Plus flowsheet run including sensitivity studies and optimization.
Flowsheet runs can contain property estimation, assay data analysis, and/or property analysis
calculations.
Assay Data
Analysis
A standalone Assay Data Analysis and pseudocomponent generation run
Use Assay Data Analysis to analyze assay data when you do not want to perform a flowsheet
simulation in the same run.
Data
Regression
A standalone Data Regression run
Use Data Regression to fit physical property model parameters required by ASPEN PLUS to
measured pure component, VLE, LLE, and other mixture data. Data Regression can contain
property estimation and property analysis calculations. ASPEN PLUS cannot perform data
regression in a Flowsheet run.
PROPERTIES
PLUS
PROPERTIES PLUS setup run
Use PROPERTIES PLUS to prepare a property package for use with Aspen Custom Modeler
(formerly SPEEDUP) or Aspen Pinch (formerly ADVENT), with third-party commercial
engineering programs, or with your company's in-house programs. You must be licensed to use
PROPERTIES PLUS.
Property
Analysis
A standalone Property Analysis run
Use Property Analysis to generate property tables, PT-envelopes, residue curve maps, and other
property reports when you do not want to perform a flowsheet simulation in the same run.
Property Analysis can contain property estimation and assay data analysis calculations.
Property
Estimation
Standalone Property Constant Estimation run
Use Property Estimation to estimate property parameters when you do not want to perform a
flowsheet simulation in the same run.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 41 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Setup Units
• Units in Aspen Plus can be defined at 3 different levels:
1. Global Level (“Input Data” & “Output Results” fields on
the Setup Specifications Global sheet)
2. Object level (“Units” field in the top of any input form
of an object such as a block or stream
3. Field Level
• Users can create their own units sets using the Setup
Units Sets Object Manager. Units can be copied from an
existing set and then modified.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 42 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Components
• Use the Components Specifications form to specify all the
components required for the simulation.
• If available, physical property parameters for each
component are retrieved from databanks.
• Pure component databanks contain parameters such as
molecular weight, critical properties, etc. The databank
search order is specified on the Databanks sheet.
• The Find button can be used to search for components.
• The Electrolyte Wizard can be used to set up an
electrolyte simulation.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 43 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Components Specifications Form
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 44 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Entering Components
• The Component ID is used to identify the component in
simulation inputs and results.
• Each Component ID can be associated with a databank
component as either:
- Formula: Chemical formula of component (e.g., C6H6)
(Note that a suffix is added to formulas when there are
isomers, e.g. C2H6O-2)
- Component Name: Full name of component (e.g.,
BENZENE)
• Databank components can be searched for using the Find
button.
- Search using component name, formula, component
class, molecular weight, boiling point, or CAS number.
- All components containing specified items will be listed.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 45 Introduction to Aspen Plus
• Find performs an AND search when more than one
criterion is specified.
Find
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 46 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Pure Component Databanks
Parameters missing from the first selected databank will be searched for
in subsequent selected databanks.
Databank Contents Use
PURE10 Data from the Design Institute for Physical
Property Data (DIPPR) and AspenTech
Primary component databank in
Aspen Plus
AQUEOUS Pure component parameters for ionic and
molecular species in aqueous solution
Simulations containing
electrolytes
SOLIDS Pure component parameters for strong
electrolytes, salts, and other solids
Simulations containing
electrolytes and solids
INORGANIC Thermochemical properties for inorganic
components in vapor, liquid and solid states
Solids, electrolytes, and
metallurgy applications
PURE93 Data from the Design Institute for Physical
Property Data (DIPPR) and AspenTech
delivered with Aspen Plus 9.3
For upward compatibility
PURE856 Data from the Design Institute for Physical
Property Data (DIPPR) and AspenTech
delivered with Aspen Plus 8.5-6
For upward compatibility
ASPENPCD Databank delivered with Aspen Plus 8.5-6 For upward compatibility
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 47 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Properties
• Use the Properties Specifications form to specify the
physical property methods to be used in the simulation.
• Property methods are a collection of models and methods
used to describe pure component and mixture behavior.
• Choosing the right physical properties is critical for
obtaining reliable simulation results.
• Selecting a Process Type will narrow the number of
methods available.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 48 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Properties Specifications Form
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 49 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Streams
• Use Stream Input forms to specify the feed stream
conditions and composition.
• To specify stream conditions enter two of the following:
- Temperature
- Pressure
- Vapor Fraction
• To specify stream composition enter either:
- Total stream flow and component fractions
- Individual component flows
• Specifications for streams that are not feeds to the
flowsheet are used as estimates.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 50 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Streams Input Form
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 51 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Blocks
• Each Block Input or Block Setup form specifies
operating conditions and equipment specifications for
the unit operation model.
• Some unit operation models require additional
specification forms
• All unit operation models have optional information
forms (e.g. BlockOptions form).
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 52 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Block Form
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 53 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Starting the Run
• Select Control Panel from the View menu or press the Next
button to be prompted.
- The simulation can be executed when all required forms
are complete.
- The Next button will take you to any incomplete forms.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 54 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Control Panel
The Control Panel consists of:
- A message window showing the progress of the
simulation by displaying the most recent messages
from the calculations
- A status area showing the hierarchy and order of
simulation blocks and convergence loops executed
- A toolbar which you can use to control the simulation
Run Start or continue calculations
Step Step through the flowsheet one
block at a time
Stop Pause simulation calculations
Reinitialize Purge simulation results
Results Check simulation results
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 55 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Reviewing Results
• History file or Control Panel Messages
- Contains any generated errors or warnings
- Select History or Control Panel on the View menu to
display the History file or the Control Panel
• Stream Results
- Contains stream conditions and compositions
• For all streams (/Data/Results Summary/Streams)
• For individual streams (bring up the stream folder in
the Data Browser and select the Results form)
• Block Results
- Contains calculated block operating conditions (bring
up the block folder in the Data Browser and select
the Results form)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 56 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Benzene Flowsheet Conditions Workshop
Objective: Add the process and feed stream conditions to a
flowsheet.
- Starting with the flowsheet created in the Benzene Flowsheet
Definition Workshop (saved as BENZENE.BKP), add the process
and feed stream conditions as shown on the next page.
Questions: 1. What is the heat duty of the block “COOL”? _________
2. What is the temperature in the second flash
block “FL2”? _________
Note: Answers for all of the workshops are located in the very
back of the course notes in Appendix C.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 57 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Benzene Flowsheet Conditions Workshop
Feed
T = 1000 F
P = 550 psia
Hydrogen: 405 lbmol/hr
Methane: 95 lbmol/hr
Benzene: 95 lbmol/hr
Toluene: 5 lbmol/hr
T = 200 F
Pdrop = 0
T = 100 F
P = 500 psia
P = 1 atm
Q = 0
Use the PENG-ROB Property Method
When finished, save as
filename: BENZENE.BKP
FL1
COOL
FEED COOL
VAP1
LIQ1
FL2
VAP2
LIQ2
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 58 Introduction to Aspen Plus
59 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Unit Operation Models
Objective:
Review major types of unit operation models
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 10, Unit Operation Models
• Unit Operation Models Reference Manual
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 60 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Unit Operation Model Types
• Mixers/Splitters
• Separators
• Heat Exchangers
• Columns
• Reactors
• Pressure Changers
• Manipulators
• Solids
• User Models
Reference: The use of specific models is best described by on-line
help and the documentation.
• Aspen Plus Unit Operation Models Reference Manual
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 61 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Mixers/Splitters
Model Description Purpose Use
Mixer Stream mixer Combine multiple
streams into one
stream
Mixing tees, stream mixing
operations, adding heat
streams, adding work streams
FSplit Stream splitter Split stream flows Stream splitters, bleed valves
SSplit Substream splitter Split substream flows Solid stream splitters, bleed
valves
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 62 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Separators
Model Description Purpose Use
Flash2 Two-outlet flash Determine thermal
and phase conditions
Flashes, evaporators, knockout
drums, single stage separators
Flash3 Three-outlet
flash
Determine thermal
and phase conditions
Decanters, single stage separators
with two liquid phases
Decanter Liquid-liquid
decanter
Determine thermal
and phase conditions
Decanters, single stage separators
with two liquid phases and no vapor
phase
Sep Multi-outlet
component
separator
Separate inlet stream
components into any
number of outlet
streams
Component separation operations
such as distillation and absorption,
when the details of the separation are
unknown or unimportant
Sep2 Two-outlet
component
separator
Separate inlet stream
components into two
outlet streams
Component separation operations
such as distillation and absorption,
when the details of the separation are
unknown or unimportant
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 63 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heat Exchangers
Model Description Purpose Use
Heater Heater or cooler Determines thermal
and phase conditions
Heaters, coolers, valves. Pumps and
compressors when work-related
results are not needed.
HeatX Two-stream
heat exchanger
Exchange heat
between two streams
Two-stream heat exchangers. Rating
shell and tube heat exchangers
when geometry is known.
MHeatX Multistream
heat exchanger
Exchange heat
between any number
of streams
Multiple hot and cold stream heat
exchangers. Two-stream heat
exchangers. LNG exchangers.
Hetran* Interface to
B-JAC Hetran
program
Design and simulate
shell and tube heat
exchangers
Shell and tube heat exchangers with
a wide variety of configurations.
Aerotran* Interface to
B-JAC Aerotran
program
Design and simulate
air-cooled heat
exchangers
Air-cooled heat exchangers with a
wide variety of configurations. Model
economizers and the convection
section of fired heaters.
* Requires separate license
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 64 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Columns - Shortcut
Model Description Purpose Use
DSTWU Shortcut distillation
design
Determine minimum RR,
minimum stages, and either
actual RR or actual stages
by Winn-Underwood-
Gilliland method.
Columns with one feed and
two product streams
Distl Shortcut distillation
rating
Determine separation
based on RR, stages, and
D:F ratio using Edmister
method.
Columns with one feed and
two product streams
SCFrac Shortcut distillation
for petroleum
fractionation
Determine product
composition and flow,
stages per section, duty
using fractionation indices.
Complex columns, such as
crude units and vacuum
towers
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 65 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Columns - Rigorous
Model Description Purpose Use
RadFrac Rigorous
fractionation
Rigorous rating and design for single
columns
Distillation, absorbers, strippers,
extractive and azeotropic distillation,
reactive distillation
MultiFrac Rigorous
fractionation for
complex columns
Rigorous rating and design for
multiple columns of any complexity
Heat integrated columns, air separators,
absorber/stripper combinations, ethylene
primary fractionator/quench tower
combinations, petroleum refining
PetroFrac Petroleum refining
fractionation
Rigorous rating and design for
petroleum refining applications
Preflash tower, atmospheric crude unit,
vacuum unit, catalytic cracker or coker
fractionator, vacuum lube fractionator,
ethylene fractionator and quench towers
BatchFrac*
+
Rigorous batch
distillation
Rigorous rating calculations for
single batch columns
Ordinary azeotropic batch distillation,
3-phase, and reactive batch distillation
RateFrac* Rate-based
distillation
Rigorous rating and design for single
and multiple columns. Based on
nonequilibrium calculations
Distillation columns, absorbers, strippers,
reactive systems, heat integrated units,
petroleum applications
Extract Liquid-liquid
extraction
Rigorous rating for liquid-liquid
extraction columns
Liquid-liquid extraction
* Requires separate license
+ Input language only in Version 10.0
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 66 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Model Description Purpose Use
RStoic Stoichiometric
reactor
Stoichiometric reactor with
specified reaction extent or
conversion
Reactors where the kinetics are unknown or
unimportant but stoichiometry and extent are
known
RYield Yield reactor Reactor with specified yield Reactors where the stoichiometry and kinetics
are unknown or unimportant but yield
distribution is known
REquil Equilibrium reactor Chemical and phase
equilibrium by
stoichiometric calculations
Single- and two-phase chemical equilibrium
and simultaneous phase equilibrium
RGibbs Equilibrium reactor Chemical and phase
equilibrium by Gibbs
energy minimization
Chemical and/or simultaneous phase and
chemical equilibrium. Includes solid phase
equilibrium.
RCSTR Continuous stirred
tank reactor
Continuous stirred tank
reactor
One, two, or three-phase stirred tank reactors
with kinetics reactions in the vapor or liquid
RPlug Plug flow reactor Plug flow reactor One, two, or three-phase plug flow reactors with
kinetic reactions in any phase. Plug flow
reactions with external coolant.
RBatch Batch reactor Batch or semi-batch
reactor
Batch and semi-batch reactors where the
reaction kinetics are known
Reactors
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 67 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Pressure Changers
Model Description Purpose Use
Pump Pump or
hydraulic
turbine
Change stream pressure when
the pressure, power requirement
or performance curve is known
Pumps and hydraulic turbines
Compr Compressor or
turbine
Change stream pressure when
the pressure, power requirement
or performance curve is known
Polytropic compressors, polytropic
positive displacement
compressors, isentropic
compressors, isentropic turbines.
MCompr Multi-stage
compressor or
turbine
Change stream pressure across
multiple stages with intercoolers.
Allows for liquid knockout
streams from intercoolers
Multistage polytropic compressors,
polytropic positive compressors,
isentropic compressors, isentropic
turbines.
Valve Control valve Determine pressure drop or
valve coefficient (CV)
Multi-phase, adiabatic flow in ball,
globe and butterfly valves
Pipe Single-segment
pipe
Determine pressure drop and
heat transfer in single-segment
pipe or annular space
Multi-phase, one dimensional,
steady-state and fully developed
pipeline flow with fittings
Pipeline Multi-segment
pipe
Determine pressure drop and
heat transfer in multi-segment
pipe or annular space
Multi-phase, one dimensional,
steady-state and fully developed
pipeline flow
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 68 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Manipulators
Model Description Purpose Use
Mult Stream multiplier Multiply stream flows by
a user supplied factor
Multiply streams for scale-up or
scale-down
Dupl Stream
duplicator
Copy a stream to any
number of outlets
Duplicate streams to look at
different scenarios in the same
flowsheet
ClChng Stream class
changer
Change stream class Link sections or blocks that use
different stream classes
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 69 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids
Model Description Uses
Crystallizer Continuous Crystallizer Mixed suspension, mixed product removal (MSMPR)
crystallizeer used for the production of a single solid product
Crusher Crushers Gyratory/jaw crusher, cage mill breaker, and single or
multiple roll crushers
Screen Screens Solids-solids separation using screens
FabFl Fabric filters Gas-solids separation using fabric filters
Cyclone Cyclones Gas-solids separation using cyclones
VScrub Venturi scrubbers Gas-solids separation using venturi scrubbers
ESP Dry electrostatic precipitators Gas-solids separation using dry electrostatic precipitators
HyCyc Hydrocyclones Liquid-solids separation using hydrocyclones
CFuge Centrifuge filters Liquid-solids separation using centrifuge filters
Filter Rotary vacuum filters Liquid-solids separation using continuous rotary vacuum
filters
SWash Single-stage solids washer Single-stage solids washer
CCD Counter-current decanter Multistage washer or a counter-current decanter
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 70 Introduction to Aspen Plus
User Models
• Proprietary models or 3-rd party software can be
included in an Aspen Plus flowsheet using a User2 unit
operation block.
• Excel Workbooks or Fortran code can be used to define
the User2 unit operation model.
• User-defined names can be associated with variables.
• Variables can be dimensioned based on other input
specifications (for example, number of components).
• Aspen Plus helper functions eliminate the need to know
the internal data structure to retrieve variables.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 71 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Subflowsheets
• Existing simulations (*.bkp or *.apw files) can be used
as part of a new flowsheet
• Select “Subflowsheet” from the User Model tab of the
Model Library to create a subflowsheet in the main
flowsheet.
• Inlet and outlet streams must have the same name in
the subflowsheet and in the main flowsheet.
• Components must be identical in all flowsheets.
• Each ID (block, stream, design-spec, etc.) must be
unique.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 72 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Model Templating
• Custom model libraries containing categorized groups
of models can be displayed with the Aspen Plus Model
Library.
• Any Aspen Plus model on the flowsheet can be added
to the custom model library. Any data entered for the
block will be associated with that model.
• Custom icons to better represent the equipment can be
created for any model in a custom model library.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 73 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Model Templating (Continued)
1. Create a custom model library, by selecting New from
the Library menu. Enter the name of the library and the
location of the library file.
2. Edit the library by selecting the library name and Edit
from the Library menu.
3. Create categories by selecting New from the Category
menu.
4. Add models to the library by selecting a block on the
flowsheet, clicking the right mouse button, and
selecting “Add to model library” from the list.
5. Select Save from the Library menu to save the library.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 74 Introduction to Aspen Plus
75 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
RadFrac
Objective:
Discuss the minimum input required for the RadFrac
fractionation model, and the use of design specifications
and stage efficiencies
Aspen Plus References:
• Unit Operation Models Reference Manual, Chapter 4, Columns
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 76 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac: Rigorous Multistage Separation
• Vapor-Liquid or Vapor-Liquid-Liquid phase simulation of:
- Ordinary distillation
- Absorption, reboiled absorption
- Stripping, reboiled stripping
- Azeotropic distillation
- Reactive distillation
• Configuration options:
- Any number of feeds
- Any number of side draws
- Total liquid draw off and pumparounds
- Any number of heaters
- Any number of decanters
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 77 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Flowsheet Connectivity
Vapor Distillate
Top-Stage or
1
Condenser Heat Duty Heat (optional)
Liquid Distillate
Water Distillate (optional)
Feeds
Reflux
Products (optional)
Heat (optional)
Pumparound
Decanters
Heat (optional)
Product
Heat (optional)
Return
Boil-up
Bottom Stage or
Nstage
Reboiler Heat Duty
Heat (optional)
Bottoms
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 78 Introduction to Aspen Plus
• Specify:
- Number of stages
- Condenser and reboiler configuration
- Two column operating specifications
- Valid phases
- Convergence
RadFrac Setup Configuration Sheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 79 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Setup Streams Sheet
• Specify:
- Feed stage location
- Feed stream convention (see Help)
ABOVE-STAGE:
Vapor from feed goes to stage above feed stage
Liquid goes to feed stage
ON-STAGE:
Vapor & Liquid from feed go to specified feed stage
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 80 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Feed Convention
On-stage
n
Above-stage
(default)
n-1
n
Vapor
Feed
n-1
Liquid
Feed
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 81 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Setup Pressure Sheet
• Specify one of:
- Column pressure profile
- Top/Bottom pressure
- Section pressure drop
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 82 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Kettle Reboiler
T = 65 C
P = 1 bar
Water: 100 kmol/hr
Methanol: 100 kmol/hr
9 Stages
Reflux Ratio = 1
Distillate to feed ratio = 0.5
Column pressure = 1 bar
Feed stage = 6
RadFrac specifications
Filename: RAD-EX.BKP
Methanol-Water RadFrac Column
Use the NRTL-RK Property Method
COLUMN
FEED
OVHD
BTMS
Total Condenser
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 83 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Options
• To set up an absorber with no condenser or reboiler, set
condenser and reboiler to none on the RadFrac Setup
Configuration sheet.
• Either Vaporization or Murphree efficiencies on either a
stage or component basis can be specified on the
RadFrac Efficiencies form.
• Tray and packed column design and rating is possible.
• A Second liquid phase may be modeled if the user selects
Vapor-liquid-liquid as Valid phases.
• Reboiler and condenser heat curves can be generated.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 84 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Plot Wizard
• Use Plot Wizard (on the Plot menu) to quickly generate
plots of results of a simulation. You can use Plot Wizard
for displaying results for the following operations:
- Physical property analysis
- Data regression analysis
- Profiles for all separation models RadFrac, MultiFrac,
PetroFrac and RateFrac
• Click the object of interest in the Data Browser to
generate plots for that particular object.
• The wizard guides you in the basic operations for
generating a plot.
• Click on the Next button to continue. Click on the
Finish button to generate a plot with default settings.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 85 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Plot Wizard Demonstration
• Use the plot wizard on the column to create a plot of
the vapor phase compositions throughout the column.
Block COLUMN: Vapor Composition Profiles
Stage
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Y


(
m
o
l
e

f
r
a
c
)
0
.
2
5
0
.
5
0
.
7
5
1
WATER
METHANOL
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 86 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac DesignSpecs and Vary
• Design specifications can be specified and executed
inside the RadFrac block using the DesignSpecs and
Vary forms.
• One or more RadFrac inputs can be manipulated to
achieve specifications on one or more RadFrac
performance parameters.
• The number of specs should, in general, be equal to the
number of varies.
• The DesignSpecs and Varys in a RadFrac are solved in a
“Middle loop.” If you get an error message saying that the
middle loop was not converged, check the DesignSpecs
and Varys you have entered.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 87 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Convergence Problems
If a RadFrac column fails to converge, doing one or more of
the following could help:
1. Check that physical property issues (choice of
Property Method, parameter availability, etc.) are
properly addressed.
2. Ensure that column operating conditions are feasible.
3. If the column err/tol is decreasing fairly consistently,
increase the maximum iterations on the RadFrac
Convergence Basic sheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 88 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Convergence Problems (Continued)
4. Provide temperature estimates for some stages in
the column using the RadFrac Estimates
Temperature sheet (useful for absorbers).
5. Provide composition estimates for some stages in
the column using the RadFrac Estimates Liquid
Composition and Vapor Composition sheet (useful
for highly non-ideal systems).
6. Experiment with different convergence methods on
the RadFrac Setup Configuration sheet.
>> When a column does not converge, it is usually
beneficial to Reinitialize after making changes.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 89 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Filename: RADFRAC.BKP
RadFrac Workshop
Use the NRTL-RK Property Method
COLUMN
FEED
DIST
BTMS
Feed:
63.2 wt% Water
36.8 wt% Methanol
Total flow = 120,000 lb/hr
Pressure 18 psia
Saturated liquid
Column specification:
38 trays (40 stages)
Feed tray = 23 (stage 24)
Total condenser
Top stage pressure = 16.1 psia
Pressure drop per stage = 0.1 psi
Distillate flowrate = 1245 lbmol/hr
Molar reflux ratio = 1.3
Part A:
• Perform a rating calculation of a Methanol tower using the following
data:
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 90 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Workshop (Continued)
Part B:
• Set up design specifications within the column so the following two
objectives are met:
- 99.95 wt% methanol in the distillate
- 99.90 wt% water in the bottoms
• To achieve these specifications, you can vary the distillate rate (800-
1700 lbmol/hr) and the reflux ratio (0.8-2). Make sure stream
compositions are reported as mass fractions before running the
problem. Note the condenser and reboiler duties:
Condenser Duty :_________
Reboiler Duty :_________
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 91 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Workshop (Continued)
Part C:
• Perform the same design calculation after specifying a 65% Murphree
efficiency for each tray. Assume the condenser and reboiler have
stage efficiencies of 90%.
• How do these efficiencies affect the condenser and reboiler duties of
the column?
Part D:
• Perform a tray sizing calculation for the entire column, given that
Bubble Cap trays are used.
(When finished, save as filename: RADFRAC.BKP)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 92 Introduction to Aspen Plus
93 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Reactor Models
Objective:
Introduce the various classes of reactor models
available, and examine in some detail at least one
reactor from each class
Aspen Plus References:
• Unit Operation Models Reference Manual, Chapter 5, Reactors
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 94 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Reactor Overview
Reactors
Balance Based
RYield
RStoic
Equilibrium Based
REquil
RGibbs
Kinetics Based
RCSTR
RPlug
RBatch
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 95 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Balanced Based Reactors
• RYield
- Requires a mass balance only, not an atom balance
- Is used to simulate reactors in which inlets to the
reactor are not completely known but outlets are
known (e.g. to simulate a furnace)
70 lb/hr H
2
O
20 lb/hr CO
2
60 lb/hr CO
250 lb/hr tar
600 lb/hr char
1000 lb/hr Coal
IN
OUT
RYield
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 96 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Balanced Based Reactors (Continued)
• RStoic
- Requires both an atom and a mass balance
- Used in situations where both the equilibrium data and
the kinetics are either unknown or unimportant
- Can specify or calculate heat of reaction at a reference
temperature and pressure
2 CO + O2
--
> 2 CO2
C + O2
--
> CO2
2 C + O2
--
> 2 CO
C, O2
IN
OUT
RStoic
C, O2, CO, CO2
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 97 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Equilibrium Based Reactors
• GENERAL
- Do not take reaction kinetics into account
- Solve similar problems, but problem specifications are
different
- Individual reactions can be at a restricted equilibrium
• REquil
- Computes combined chemical and phase equilibrium
by solving reaction equilibrium equations
- Cannot do a 3-phase flash
- Useful when there are many components, a few known
reactions, and when relatively few components take
part in the reactions
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 98 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Equilibrium Based Reactors (Continued)
• RGibbs
- Unknown Reactions
This feature is quite useful when reactions occurring
are not known or are high in number due to many
components participating in the reactions.
- Gibbs Energy Minimization
A Gibbs free energy minimization is done to determine
the product composition at which the Gibbs free
energy of the products is at a minimum.
- Solid Equilibrium
RGibbs is the only Aspen Plus block that will deal with
solid-liquid-gas phase equilibrium.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 99 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Kinetic Reactors
• Kinetic reactors are RCSTR, RPlug and RBatch.
• Reaction kinetics are taken into account, and hence must
be specified.
• Kinetics can be specified using one of the built-in models,
or with a user subroutine. The current built-in models are
- Power Law
- Langmuir-Hinshelwood-Hougen-Watson (LHHW)
• A catalyst for a reaction can have a reaction coefficient of
zero.
• Reactions are specified using a Reaction ID.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 100 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Using a Reaction ID
• Reaction IDs are setup as objects, separate from the
reactor, and then referenced within the reactor(s).
• A single Reaction ID can be referenced in any number of
kinetic reactors (RCSTR, RPlug and RBatch.)
• To set up a Reaction ID, go to the Reactions Reactions
Object Manager
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 101 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Power-law Rate Expression

,
`

.
|
]
]
]

− −

,
`

.
|
− ·
0
n
0
1 1 Energy Activation
exp Factor) l exponentia Pre (
T T R T
T
k
rate k concent rati on
i
i
·

* [ ]
exponent
i
Example:
2 3 2
1
2
A B C D
k
k
+
÷ → ÷
← ÷ ÷
+
Forward reaction: (Assuming the reaction is 2nd order in A)
coefficients: A: B: C: D:
exponents: A: B: C: D:
-2 -3 1 2
2 0 0 0
Reverse reaction: (Assuming the reaction is 1st order in C and D)
coefficients: C: D: A: B:
exponents: C: D: A: B:
-1 -2 2 3
1 1 0 0
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 102 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heats of Reaction
• Heats of reaction need not be provided for reactions.
• Heats of reaction are typically calculated as the difference
between inlet and outlet enthalpies for the reactor (see
Appendix A).
• If you have a heat of reaction value that does not match
the value calculated by Aspen Plus, you can adjust the
heats of formation (DHFORM) of one or more
components to make the heats of reaction match.
• Heats of reaction can also be calculated or specified at a
reference temperature and pressure in an RStoic reactor.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 103 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Reactor Workshop
Objective: Compare the use of different reactor types to
model one reaction.
Reactor Conditions:
Temperature = 70 C
Pressure = 1 atm
Stoichiometry:
Ethanol + Acetic Acid <
--
> Ethyl Acetate + Water
Kinetic Parameters:
Forward Reaction: Pre-exp. Factor = 1.9 x 10
8
, Act. Energy = 5.95 x 10
7
J/kmol
Reverse Reaction: Pre-exp. Factor = 5.0 x 10
7
,Act. Energy = 5.95 x 10
7
J/kmol
Reactions are first order with respect to each of the reactants in the reaction (second
order overall).
Reactions occur in the liquid phase.
Composition basis is Molarity.
Hint: Check that each reactor is considering both Vapor and Liquid as Valid phases.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 104 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Reactor Workshop (Continued)
Temp = 70 C
Pres = 1 atm
Feed:
Water: 8.892 kmol/hr
Ethanol: 186.59 kmol/hr
Acetic Acid: 192.6 kmol/hr
Length = 2 meters
Diameter = 0.3 meters
Volume = 0.14 Cu. M.
70 % conversion of ethanol
When finished, save as
filename: REACTORS.BKP
Use the NRTL-RK property method
RSTOIC
F-STOIC
P-STOIC
RGIBBS
F-GIBBS P-GIBBS
RPLUG
F-PLUG P-PLUG
DUPL
FEED
F-CSTR
RCSTR
P-CSTR
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 105 Introduction to Aspen Plus
106 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Cyclohexane Production Workshop
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 107 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Cyclohexane Production Workshop
Objective: Create a flowsheet to model a cyclohexane
production process
Cyclohexane can be produced by the hydrogenation of benzene in the
following reaction:
C
6
H
6
+ 3 H
2
= C
6
H
12
Benzene Hydrogen Cyclohexane
The benzene and hydrogen feeds are combined with recycle hydrogen
and cyclohexane before entering a fixed bed catalytic reactor. Assume
a benzene conversion of 99.8%.
The reactor effluent is cooled and the light gases separated from the
product stream. Part of the light gas stream is fed back to the reactor as
recycle hydrogen.
The liquid product stream from the separator is fed to a distillation
column to further remove any dissolved light gases and to stabilize the
end product. A portion of the cyclohexane product is recycled to the
reactor to aid in temperature control.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 108 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Cyclohexane Production Workshop
C
6
H
6
+ 3 H
2
= C
6
H
12
Benzene Hydrogen Cyclohexane
Use the RK-SOAVE property method
When finished, save as
filename: CYCLOHEX.BKP
Bottoms rate = 99 kmol/hr
P = 25 bar
T = 50 C
Molefrac H2 = 0.975
N2 = 0.005
CH4 = 0.02
Total flow = 330 kmol/hr
T = 40 C
P = 1 bar
Benzene flow = 100 kmol/hr
T = 150C
P = 23 bar
T = 200 C
Pdrop = 1 bar
Benzene conv =
0.998
T = 50 C
Pdrop = 0.5 bar
92% flow to stream H2RCY
30% flow to stream CHRCY
Specify cyclohexane mole
recovery of 0.9999 by varying
Bottoms rate from 97 to 101 kmol/hr
Theoretical Stages = 12
Reflux ratio = 1.2
Partial Condenser with
vapor distillate only
Column Pressure = 15 bar
Feed stage = 8
REACT
FEED-MIX
H2IN
BZIN
H2RCY
CHRCY
RXIN
RXOUT
HP-SEP
VAP
COLUMN
COLFD
LTENDS
PRODUCT
VFLOW
PURGE
LFLOW
LIQ
109 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Physical Properties
Objectives:
Introduce the ideas of property methods and physical
property parameters
Identify issues involved in the choice of a property method
Cover the use of Property Analysis for reporting physical
properties
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 7, Physical Property Methods
• User Guide, Chapter 8, Physical Property Parameters and Data
• User Guide, Chapter 29, Analyzing Properties
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 110 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Case Study - Acetone Recovery
• Correct choice of physical property models and accurate
physical property parameters are essential for obtaining
accurate simulation results.
Ideal
Approach
Equation of
State Approach
Activity Coefficient
Model Approach
Predicted number of stages
required
11 7 42
Approximate cost in dollars 520,000 390,000 880,000
FEED
OVHD
BTMS
COLUMN
5000 lbmol/hr
10 mole % acetone
90 mole % water
Specification: 99.5 mole % acetone recovery
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 111 Introduction to Aspen Plus
How to Establish Physical Properties
Choose a Property Method
Check Parameters/Obtain
Additional Parameters
Confirm Results
Create the Flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 112 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Property Methods
• A Property Method is a collection of models and methods
used to calculate physical properties.
• Property Methods containing commonly used
thermodynamic models are provided in Aspen Plus.
• Users can modify existing Property Methods or create
new ones.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 113 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Approaches to representing physical properties of
components
Physical Property Models
Ideal Equation of State Activity Special
(EOS) Coefficient Models
Models Models
Physical Property Models
• Choice of model types depends on degree of non-ideal
behavior and operating conditions.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 114 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Ideal vs. Non-Ideal Behavior
• What do we mean by ideal behavior?
- Ideal Gas law and Raoult’s law
• Which systems behave as ideal?
- Non-polar components of similar size and shape
• What controls degree of non-ideality?
- Molecular interactions
e.g. Polarity, size and shape of the molecules
• How can we study the degree of non-ideality of a system?
- Property plots (e.g. TXY & XY)
x
y
x
y
x
y
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 115 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Comparison of EOS and Activity Models
EOS Models Activity Coefficient Models
Limited in ability to represent
non-ideal liquids
Can represent highly non-ideal liquids
Fewer binary parameters
required
Many binary parameters required
Parameters extrapolate
reasonably with temperature
Binary parameters are highly
temperature dependent
Consistent in critical region Inconsistent in critical region
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 116 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Common Property Methods
• Equation of State Property Methods
- PENG-ROB
- RK-SOAVE
• Activity Coefficient Property Methods
- NRTL
- UNIFAC
- UNIQUAC
- WILSON
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 117 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Henry's Law
• Henry's Law is only used with ideal and activity coefficient
models.
• It is used to determine the amount of a supercritical
component or light gas in the liquid phase.
• Any supercritical components or light gases (CO
2
, N
2
,
etc.) should be declared as Henry's components
(Components Henry Comps Selection sheet).
• The Henry's components list ID should be entered on
Properties Specifications Global sheet in the Henry
Components field.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 118 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Choosing a Property Method - Review
Do you have any
polar components
in your system?
Are the operating conditions
near the critical region of the
mixture?
Do you have light gases or
supercritical components
in your system?
Use activity
coefficient model
with Henry’s Law
Use activity
coefficient
model
Use EOS Model
N
N
N Y
Y
Y
Reference: Aspen Plus User
Guide, Chapter 7, Physical
Property Methods, gives
similar, more detailed
guidelines for choosing a
Property Method.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 119 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Choosing a Property Method - Example
Choose an appropriate Property Method for the following
systems of components at ambient conditions.
System Model Type Property Method
Propane, Ethane, Butane EOS RK-SOAVE, PENG-ROB
Benzene, Water Activity Coefficient NRTL-RK, UNIQUAC
Acetone, Water Activity Coefficient NRTL-RK, WILSON
System Property Method
Ethanol, Water
Benzene, Toluene
Acetone, Water, Carbon Dioxide
Water, Cyclohexane
Ethane and Propanol
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 120 Introduction to Aspen Plus
How to Establish Physical Properties
Choose a Property Method
Check Parameters/Obtain
Additional Parameters
Confirm Results
Create the Flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 121 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Pure Component Parameters
• Represent attributes of a single component
• Input in the Properties Parameters Pure Component
folder.
• Stored in databanks such as PURE10, ASPENPCD,
SOLIDS, etc. (The selected databanks are listed on the
Components Specifications Databanks sheet.)
• Parameters retrieved into the Graphical User Interface by
selecting Retrieve Parameter Results from the tools menu.
• Examples
- Scalar: MW for molecular weight
- Temperature-Dependent: PLXANT for parameters in
the extended Antoine vapor pressure model
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 122 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Binary Parameters
• Used to describe interactions between two components
• Input in the Properties Parameters Binary Interaction
folder
• Stored in binary databanks such as VLE-IG, LLE-ASPEN
• Parameter values from the databanks can be viewed on
the input forms in the Graphical User Interface.
• Parameter forms that include data from the databanks
must be viewed before the flowsheet is complete.
• Examples
- Scalar: RKTKIJ for the Rackett model
- Temperature-Dependent: NRTL for parameters in the
NRTL model
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 123 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Displaying Property Parameters
• Aspen Plus does not display all databank parameters
on the parameter input forms.
• Select Retrieve Parameter Results from the Tools
menu to retrieve all parameters for the components and
property methods defined in the simulation.
• All results that are currently loaded will be lost. They
can be regenerated by running the simulation again.
• The parameters are viewed on the Properties
Parameters Results forms.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 124 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Reporting Physical Property Parameters
Follow this procedure to obtain a report file containing
values of ALL pure component and binary parameters for
ALL components used in a simulation:
1. On the Setup Report Options Property sheet,
select All physical property parameters used (in SI
units) or select Property parameters’ descriptions,
equations, and sources of data.
2. After running the simulation, export a report (*.rep)
file (Select Export from the File menu).
3. Edit the .rep file using any text editor. (From the
Graphical User Interface, you can choose Report
from the View menu.) The parameters are listed
under the heading PARAMETER VALUES in the
physical properties section of the report file.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 125 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Parameter Reports
All physical property
parameters used
(in SI units)
Property parameters’
descriptions, equations,
and sources of data
Parameters are reported in SI
units, and the units of the
parameters are not printed.
Parameters are reported in
output-units, and the units of the
parameters are printed.
Only Aspen Plus abbreviations for
the parameter names are printed.
Aspen Plus abbreviation along
with a description is printed
Output is fairly compact. Output is quite long.
Equations for temperature-
dependent parameters are listed.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 126 Introduction to Aspen Plus
How to Establish Physical Properties
Choose a Property Method
Check Parameters/Obtain
Additional Parameters
Confirm Results
Create the Flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 127 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Property Analysis
• Used to generate simple property diagrams to validate
physical property models and data
• Diagram Types:
- Pure component, e.g. Vapor pressure vs. temperature
- Binary, e.g. TXY, PXY
- Ternary residue maps
• Select Analysis from the Tools menu to start Analysis.
• Additional binary plots are available under the Plot
Wizard button on result form containing raw data.
• When using a binary analysis to check for liquid-liquid
phase separation, remember to choose Vapor-Liquid-
Liquid as Valid phases.
• Property analysis input and results can be saved as a
form for later reference and use.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 128 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Property Analysis - Common Plots
Ideal XY Plot: XY Plot Showing Azeotrope:
XY Plot Showing 2 liquid phases:
y-x diagram for METHANOL / PROPANOL
LIQUID MOLEFRAC METHANOL
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0
.
2
0
.
4
0
.
6
0
.
8
1
V
A
P
O
R

M
O
L
E
F
R
A
C

M
E
T
H
A
N
O
L
(PRES = 14.7 PSI)
y-x diagram for ETHANOL / TOLUENE
LIQUID MOLEFRAC ETHANOL
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0
.
2
0
.
4
0
.
6
0
.
8
1
V
A
P
O
R

M
O
L
E
F
R
A
C

E
T
H
A
N
O
L
(PRES = 14.7 PSI)
y-x diagram for TOLUENE / WATER
LIQUID MOLEFRAC TOLUENE
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0
.
2
0
.
4
0
.
6
0
.
8
1
V
A
P
O
R

M
O
L
E
F
R
A
C

T
O
L
U
E
N
E
(PRES = 14.7 PSI)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 129 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Additional Data from DETHERM
• DETHERM databank is maintained by DECHEMA.
• DETHERM contains the world’s most comprehensive
single source of thermophysical properties.
- Phase equilibria data
- Azeotropic data
- Excess properties
- PVT data
- Caloric properties
- Transport properties
- Electrolyte data
• The interface can be launched from within Aspen Plus to
access data via the Internet or CD-ROM.
• Users are charged for each set of data that is downloaded.
• Data can be regressed using Aspen Plus Data Regression.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 130 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Interface to DETHERM Example
1. Enter your components on the Components
Specifications Selection sheet.
2. Click on the DETHERM Interface button on the toolbar.
3. Click on the Search button in the DETHERM interface.
4. Select the data sets from the list of data.
5. Click on the Transfer button.
6. Enter your user ID information.
7. Receive the data into Aspen Plus.
- Scalar data is entered on Property Parameters forms.
- Temperature dependent and Binary data sets are
entered on the Properties Data forms.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 131 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Interface to DETHERM Example
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 132 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Interface to DETHERM Example
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 133 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Interface to the DETHERM Databank
• For more information
- The AspenTech partnership with DECHEMA
- Download and usage of DETHERM Internet Client
- How to sign up for an account
http://www.aspentech.com/partner/. (then click on DECHEMA)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 134 Introduction to Aspen Plus
How to Establish Physical Properties
Choose a Property Method
Check Parameters/Obtain
Additional Parameters
Confirm Results
Create the Flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 135 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Establishing Physical Properties - Review
1. Choose Property Method - Select a Property Method based on
- Components present in simulation
- Operating conditions in simulation
- Available data or parameters for the components
2. Check Parameters - Determine parameters available in Aspen
Plus databanks
3. Obtain Additional Parameters (if necessary) - Parameters that
are needed can be obtained from
- Literature searches
- Regression of experimental data (Data Regression)
- Property Constant Estimation (Property Estimation)
4. Confirm Results - Verify choice of Property Method and
physical property data using
- Physical Property Analysis
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 136 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Property Sets
• A property set (Prop-Set) is a way of accessing a
collection, or set, of properties as an object with a user-
given name. Only the name of the property set is
referenced when using the properties in an application.
• Use property sets to report thermodynamic, transport, and
other property values.
• Current property set applications include:
- Design specifications, Fortran blocks, sensitivity
- Stream reports
- Physical property tables (Property Analysis)
- Tray properties (RadFrac, MultiFrac, etc.)
- Heating/cooling curves (Flash2, MHeatX, etc.)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 137 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Properties included in Prop-Sets
• Properties commonly included in property sets include:
- VFRAC - Molar vapor fraction of a stream
- BETA - Fraction of liquid in a second liquid phase
- CPMX - Constant pressure heat capacity for a mixture
- MUMX - Viscosity for a mixture
• Available properties include:
- Thermodynamic properties of components in a mixture
- Pure component thermodynamic properties
- Transport properties
- Electrolyte properties
- Petroleum-related properties
Reference: Aspen Plus Physical Property Data Reference Manual,
Chapter 4, Property Sets, has a complete list of properties that can be
included in a property set.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 138 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Specifying Property Sets
• Use the Properties Prop-Sets form to specify properties in
a property set.
• The Search button can be used to search for a property.
• All specified qualifiers apply to each property specified,
where applicable.
• Users can define new properties on the Properties
Advanced User-Properties form by providing a Fortran
subroutine.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 139 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Predefined Property Sets
Some simulation Templates contain predefined property
sets.
The following table lists predefined property sets and the
types of properties they contain for the General Template:
Predefined Property Set Types of Properties
HXDESIGN Heat exchanger design
THERMAL Mixture thermal (HMX, CPMX,
KMX)
TXPORT Transport
VLE Vapor-liquid equilibrium
(PHIMX, GAMMA, PL)
VLLE Vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 140 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Stream Results Options
• On the Setup Report Options Stream sheet, use:
- Flow Basis and Fraction Basis check-boxes to
specify how stream composition is reported
- Property Sets button to specify names of property
sets containing additional properties to be reported for
each stream
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 141 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Definition of Terms
• Property Method - Set of property models and methods
used to calculate the properties required for a simulation
• Property - Calculated physical property value such as
mixture enthalpy
• Property Model - Equation or equations used to
calculate a physical property
• Property Parameter - Constant used in a property model
• Property Set (Prop-Set) - A method of accessing
properties so that they can be used or tabulated
elsewhere
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 142 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Physical Properties Workshop
Objective: Simulate a two-liquid phase settling tank and
investigate the physical properties of the system.
A refinery has a settling tank that they use to decant off the water from a
mixture of water and a heavy oil. The inlet stream to the tank also
contains some carbon-dioxide and nitrogen. The tank and feed are at
ambient temperature and pressure (70
o
F, 1atm), and have the following
flow rates of the various components:
Water 515 lb/hr
Oil 4322 lb/hr
CO2 751 lb/hr
N2 43 lb/hr
Use the compound n-decane to represent the oil. It is known that water
and oil form two liquid phases under the conditions in the tank.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 143 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Physical Properties Workshop (Continued)
1. Choose an appropriate Property Method to represent this system.
Check to see that the required binary physical property parameters
are available.
2. Using the property analysis feature, verify that the chosen physical
property model and the available parameters predict the formation
of 2 liquid phases.
3. Set up a simulation to model the settling tank. Use a Flash3 block
to represent the tank.
4. Modify the stream report to include the constant pressure heat
capacity (CPMX) for each phase (Vapor, 1st Liquid and 2nd Liquid),
and the fraction of liquid in a second liquid phase (BETA), for all
streams.
5. Retrieve the physical property parameters used in the simulation
and determine the critical temperature for carbon dioxide and water.
TC(carbon dioxide) = _______; TC(water) = _______
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 144 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Physical Properties Workshop (Continued)
Optional Part:
Objective: Generate a table of compositions for each liquid
phase (1st Liquid and 2nd Liquid) at different temperatures
for a mixture of water and oil. Tabulate the vapor pressure of
the components in the same table.
• In addition to the interactive Analysis commands under the Tools
menu, you also can create a Property Analysis manually, using forms.
• Manually generated Properties Analyses are created using the
Properties Analysis Object Manager.
• Manually created Property Analyses can be executed at the end of a
flowsheet simulation or as a stand-alone run using a Run-Type of
Property Analysis.
• A manually generated Generic Property Analysis is similar to the
interactive Analysis commands, however it is more flexible regarding
input and reporting.
Detailed instructions are on the following slide.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 145 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Physical Properties Workshop (Continued)
Problem Specifications:
1. Create a Generic type property analysis.
2. Generate points along a flash curve.
3. Define component flows of 50 mole water and 50 mole oil.
4. Set Valid phases to Vapor-liquid-liquid.
5. Vary the temperature from 50 to 400 F.
6. Use a vapor fraction of zero.
7. Tabulate a new property set that includes:
a. Mole fraction of water and oil in the 1st and 2nd liquid phases
b. Mole flow of water and oil in the 1st and 2nd liquid phases
c. Beta - the fraction of the 1st liquid to the total liquid
d. Pure component vapor pressures of water and oil
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 146 Introduction to Aspen Plus
147 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Accessing Variables
Objective:
Become familiar with referencing flowsheet variables
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 18, Accessing Flowsheet Variables
Related Topics:
• User Guide, Chapter 20, Sensitivity
• User Guide, Chapter 21, Design Specifications
• User Guide, Chapter 19, Fortran Blocks and In-Line Fortran
• User Guide, Chapter 22, Optimization
• User Guide, Chapter 23, Fitting a Simulation Model to Data
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 148 Introduction to Aspen Plus
• What is the effect of the reflux ratio of the column on the
purity (mole fraction of component B) of the distillate?
• To perform this analysis, references must be made to 2
flowsheet quantities, i.e. 2 flowsheet variables must be
accessed:
1. The reflux ratio of the column
2. The mole fraction of component B in the stream
OVHD
Why Access Variables?
COLUMN FEED
OVHD
BTMS
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 149 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Accessing Variables
• An accessed variable is a reference to a particular
flowsheet quantity, e.g. temperature of a stream or duty of
a block.
• Accessed variables can be read from, written to, or both.
• Flowsheet result variables (calculated quantities) should
not be overwritten or varied.
• The concept of accessing variables is used in sensitivity
analyses, design specifications, in-line Fortran,
optimization, etc.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 150 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Variable Categories
Variable Category Type of Variable
Blocks Block variables and vectors
Streams Stream variables and vectors.
Both non-component variables and
component dependent flow and composition
variables can be accessed.
Model Utility Parameters, balance block and pressure
relief variables
Property Property parameters
Reactions Reactions and chemistry variables
Costing Costing variables
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 151 Introduction to Aspen Plus
• When completing a Define sheet, such as on a Fortran,
Design specification or Sensitivity form, specify the
variables on the Variable Definition dialog box.
• You cannot modify the variables on the Define sheet itself.
• On the Variable Definition dialog box, select the variable
category and Aspen Plus will display the other fields
necessary to complete the variable definition.
• If you are editing an existing variable and want to change
the variable name, click the right mouse button on the
Variable Name field. On the popup menu, click Rename.
Variable Definition Dialog Box
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 152 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes
1. If the Mass-Frac, Mole-Frac or StdVol-Frac of a component in
a stream is accessed, it should not be modified. To modify the
composition of a stream, access and modify the Mass-Flow,
Mole-Flow or StdVol-Flow of the desired component.
2. If duty is specified for a block, that duty can be read and written
using the variable DUTY for that block. If the duty for a block is
calculated during simulation, it should be read using the
variable QCALC.
3. PRES is the specified pressure or pressure drop, and PDROP
is pressure drop used in calculating pressure profile in heating
or cooling curves.
4. Only streams that are feeds to the flowsheet should be varied
or modified directly.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 153 Introduction to Aspen Plus
154 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Sensitivity Analysis
Objective:
Introduce the use of sensitivity analysis to study
relationships between process variables
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 20, Sensitivity
Related Topics:
• User Guide, Chapter 18, Accessing Flowsheet Variables
• User Guide, Chapter 19, Fortran Blocks and In-Line Fortran
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 155 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Sensitivity Analysis
• Allows user to study the effect of changes in input
variables on process outputs.
• Results can be viewed by looking at the Results form in
the folder for the Sensitivity block.
• Results may be graphed to easily visualize relationships
between different variables.
• Changes made to a flowsheet input quantity in a
sensitivity block do not affect the simulation. The
sensitivity study is run independently of the base-case
simulation.
• Located under /Data/Model Analysis Tools/Sensitivity
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 156 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Sensitivity Analysis Example
What is the effect of cooler outlet temperature on the purity
of the product stream?
• What is the manipulated (varied) variable?
• What is the measured (sampled) variable?
Filename: CUMENE-S.BKP
» Cooler outlet temperature
» Purity (mole fraction) of cumene in product stream
REACTOR
FEED
RECYCLE
REAC-OUT
COOL
COOL-OUT
SEP
PRODUCT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 157 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Sensitivity S-1 Results Summary
VARY 1 COOL PARAM TEMP F
50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350
C
U
M
E
N
E

P
R
O
D
U
C
T

P
U
R
I
T
Y
0
.
8
5
0
.
9
0
.
9
5
1
Sensitivity Analysis Results
• What is happening below 75 F and above 300 F?
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 158 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Uses of Sensitivity Analysis
• Studying the effect of changes in input variables on
process (model) outputs
• Graphically representing the effects of input variables
• Verifying that a solution to a design specification is
feasible
• Rudimentary optimization
• Studying time varying variables using a quasi-steady-
state approach
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 159 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Using Sensitivity Analysis
1. Specify measured (sampled) variable(s)
- These are quantities calculated during the simulation to
be used in step 4 (Sensitivity Input Define sheet).
2. Specify manipulated (varied) variable(s)
- These are the flowsheet variables to be varied
(Sensitivity Input Vary sheet).
3. Specify range(s) for manipulated (varied) variable(s)
- Variation for manipulated variable can be specified either
as equidistant points within an interval or as a list of
values for the variable (Sensitivity Input Vary sheet).
4. Specify quantities to calculate and tabulate
- Tabulated quantities can be any valid Fortran expression
containing variables defined in step 1 (Sensitivity Input
Tabulate sheet).
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 160 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Plotting
1. Select the column containing the X-axis variable and then
select X-Axis Variable from the Plot menu.
2. Select the column containing the Y-axis variable and then
select Y-Axis Variable from the Plot menu.
3. (Optional) Select the column containing the parametric
variable and then select Parametric Variable from the
Plot menu.
4. Select Display Plot from the Plot menu.
» To select a column, click on the heading of the column
with the left mouse button.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 161 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes
1. Only quantities that have been input to the flowsheet
should be varied or manipulated.
2. Multiple inputs can be varied.
3. The simulation is run for every combination of
manipulated (varied) variables.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 162 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Sensitivity Analysis Workshop
Part A:
Using the cyclohexane production flowsheet Workshop (saved as
CYCLOHEX.BKP), plot the variation of reactor duty (block REACT) as
the recycle split fraction in LFLOW is varied from 0.1 to 0.4.
Optional Part B:
In addition to the fraction split off as recycle (Part A), vary the
conversion of benzene in the reactor from 0.9 to 1.0. Tabulate the
reactor duty and construct a parametric plot showing the dependence of
reactor duty on the fraction split off as recycle and conversion of
benzene.
Note: Both of these studies (parts A and B) should be set up within the
same sensitivity analysis block.
When finished, save as filename: SENS.BKP.
Objective: Use a sensitivity analysis to study the effect of
the recycle flowrate on the reactor duty in the cyclohexane
flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 163 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Cyclohexane Production Workshop
C
6
H
6
+ 3 H
2
= C
6
H
12
Benzene Hydrogen Cyclohexane
Use the RK-SOAVE property method
Bottoms rate = 99 kmol/hr
P = 25 bar
T = 50 C
Molefrac H2 = 0.975
N2 = 0.005
CH4 = 0.02
Total flow = 330 kmol/hr
T = 40 C
P = 1 bar
Benzene flow = 100 kmol/hr
T = 150C
P = 23 bar
T = 200 C
Pdrop = 1 bar
Benzene conv =
0.998
T = 50 C
Pdrop = 0.5 bar
92% flow to stream H2RCY
30% flow to stream CHRCY
Specify cyclohexane mole
recovery of 0.9999 by varying
Bottoms rate from 97 to 101 kmol/hr
Theoretical Stages = 12
Reflux ratio = 1.2
Partial Condenser with
vapor distillate only
Column Pressure = 15 bar
Feed stage = 8
REACT
FEED-MIX
H2IN
BZIN
H2RCY
CHRCY
RXIN
RXOUT
HP-SEP
VAP
COLUMN
COLFD
LTENDS
PRODUCT
VFLOW
PURGE
LFLOW
LIQ
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 164 Introduction to Aspen Plus
165 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Design Specifications
Objective:
Introduce the use of design specifications to meet process
design requirements
Aspen Plus References:
•User Guide, Chapter 21, Design Specifications
Related Topics:
•User Guide, Chapter 18, Accessing Flowsheet Variables
•User Guide, Chapter 19, Fortran Blocks and In-Line Fortran
•User Guide, Chapter 17, Convergence
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 166 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Design Specifications
• Similar to a feedback controller
• Allows user to set the value of a calculated flowsheet
quantity to a particular value
• Objective is achieved by manipulating a specified input
variable
• No results associated directly with a design specification
• Located under /Data/Flowsheeting Options/Design Specs
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 167 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Design Specification Example
What should the cooler outlet temperature be to achieve a
cumene product purity of 98 mole percent?
• What is the manipulated (varied) variable?
• What is the measured (sampled) variable?
• What is the specification (target) to be achieved?
Filename: CUMENE-D.BKP
» Cooler outlet temperature
» Mole fraction of cumene in stream PRODUCT
» Mole fraction of cumene in stream PRODUCT = 0.98
REACTOR
FEED
RECYCLE
REAC-OUT
COOL
COOL-OUT
SEP
PRODUCT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 168 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Using Design Specifications
1. Identify measured (sampled) variables
These are flowsheet quantities, usually calculated
quantities, to be included in the objective function
(Design Spec Define sheet).
2. Specify objective function (Spec) and goal (Target)
This is the equation that the specification attempts to
satisfy (Design Spec Spec sheet). The units of the
variable used in the objective function are the units for
that type of variable as specified by the Units Set
declared for the design specification.
3. Set tolerance for objective function
The specification is said to be converged if the objective
function equation is satisfied to within this tolerance
(Design Spec Spec sheet).
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 169 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Using Design Specifications (Continued)
4. Specify manipulated (varied) variable
This is the variable whose value the specification
changes in order to satisfy the objective function
equation (Design Spec Vary sheet).
5. Specify range of manipulated (varied) variable
These are the lower and upper bounds of the interval
within which Aspen Plus will vary the manipulated
variable (Design Spec Vary sheet). The units of the
limits for the varied variable are the units for that type of
variable as specified by the Units Set declared for the
design specification.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 170 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes
1. Only quantities that have been input to the flowsheet
should be manipulated.
2. The calculations performed by a design specification are
iterative. Providing a good estimate for the manipulated
variable will help the design specification converge in
fewer iterations. This is especially important for large
flowsheets with several interrelated design specifications.
3. The results of a design specification can be found under
Data/Convergence/Convergence, by opening the
appropriate solver block, and choosing the Results form.
Alternatively, the final values of the manipulated and/or
sampled variables can be viewed directly on the
appropriate Stream/Block results forms.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 171 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes (Continued)
4. If a design-spec does not converge:
a. Check to see that the manipulated variable is not at
its lower or upper bound.
b. Verify that a solution exists within the bounds
specified for the manipulated variable, perhaps by
performing a sensitivity analysis.
c. Check to ensure that the manipulated variable does
indeed affect the value of the sampled variables.
d. Try providing a better starting estimate for the value
of the manipulated variable.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 172 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes (Continued)
e. Try changing the characteristics of the convergence
block associated with the design-spec (step size,
number of iterations, algorithm, etc.)
f. Try narrowing the bounds of the manipulated variable
or loosening the tolerance on the objective function
to help convergence.
g. Make sure that the objective function does not have a
flat region within the range of the manipulated
variable.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 173 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Design Specification Workshop
The cyclohexane production flowsheet workshop (saved as
CYCLOHEX.BKP) is a model of an existing plant. The cooling system
around the reactor can handle a maximum operating load of 4.7
MMkcal/hr. Determine the amount of cyclohexane recycle necessary to
keep the cooling load on the reactor to this amount.
Note: The heat convention used in Aspen Plus is that heat input to a
block is positive, and heat removed from a block is negative.
When finished, save as filename: DES-SPEC.BKP
Objective: Use a design specification in the cyclohexane
flowsheet to fix the heat load on the reactor by varying the
recycle flowrate.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 174 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Cyclohexane Production Workshop
C
6
H
6
+ 3 H
2
= C
6
H
12
Benzene Hydrogen Cyclohexane
Use the RK-SOAVE property method
Bottoms rate = 99 kmol/hr
P = 25 bar
T = 50 C
Molefrac H2 = 0.975
N2 = 0.005
CH4 = 0.02
Total flow = 330 kmol/hr
T = 40 C
P = 1 bar
Benzene flow = 100 kmol/hr
T = 150C
P = 23 bar
T = 200 C
Pdrop = 1 bar
Benzene conv =
0.998
T = 50 C
Pdrop = 0.5 bar
92% flow to stream H2RCY
30% flow to stream CHRCY
Specify cyclohexane mole
recovery of 0.9999 by varying
Bottoms rate from 97 to 101 kmol/hr
Theoretical Stages = 12
Reflux ratio = 1.2
Partial Condenser with
vapor distillate only
Column Pressure = 15 bar
Feed stage = 8
REACT
FEED-MIX
H2IN
BZIN
H2RCY
CHRCY
RXIN
RXOUT
HP-SEP
VAP
COLUMN
COLFD
LTENDS
PRODUCT
VFLOW
PURGE
LFLOW
LIQ
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 175 Introduction to Aspen Plus
176 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Fortran Blocks
Objective:
Introduce usage of Fortran blocks in Aspen Plus
Aspen Plus References:
•User Guide, Chapter 19, Fortran Blocks and In-Line Fortran
Related Topics:
•User Guide, Chapter 20, Sensitivity
•User Guide, Chapter 21, Design Specifications
•User Guide, Chapter 18, Accessing Flowsheet Variables
•User Guide, Chapter 22, Optimization
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 177 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Fortran Blocks
• Allows user to write Fortran to be executed by Aspen Plus
• Simple Fortran can be translated by Aspen Plus and does
not need to be compiled.
• A Fortran compiler must be present on the machine where
the Aspen Plus engine is running to compile more
complex Fortran code.
• Results of the execution of a Fortran block must be
viewed by directly examining the values of the variables
modified by the Fortran block.
• Located under /Data/Flowsheeting Options/Fortran
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 178 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Fortran Block Example
Use of a Fortran block to set the pressure drop across a
Heater block.
Pressure drop across heater is proportional to square of
volumetric flow into heater.
Fortran Block
DELTA-P = -10
-9
* V
2
V
Filename: CUMENE-F.BKP
DELTA-P
REACTOR
FEED
RECYCLE
REAC-OUT
COOL
COOL-OUT
SEP
PRODUCT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 179 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Fortran Block Example (Continued)
• Which flowsheet variables must be accessed?
• When should the Fortran block be executed?
• Which variables are read and which are written?
» Volumetric flow of stream REAC-OUT
This can be accessed in two different ways:
1. Mass flow and mass density of stream REAC-OUT
2. A prop-set containing volumetric flow of a mixture
» Pressure drop across block COOL
» Before block COOL
» Volumetric flow is read
» Pressure drop is written
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 180 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Uses of Fortran Blocks
• Feed-forward control (setting flowsheet inputs based on
upstream calculated values)
• Calling external subroutines
• Input / output to and from external files
• Writing to Control Panel, History File, or Report File
• Custom reports
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 181 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Fortran Interpreter
• Aspen Plus will interpret in-line Fortran if it is possible.
• The following Fortran can be interpreted:
Arithmetic expressions and assignment statements
IF statements
GOTO statements, except assigned GOTO
WRITE statements that do not have unformatted text in them
FORMAT statements
CONTINUE statements
DO loops
Calls to some built-in Fortran functions
REAL or INTEGER statements*
DOUBLE PRECISION statements*
DIMENSION statements*
* Enter on the Declaration sheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 182 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Built-In Fortran Functions
• Calls to some built-in Fortran functions:
DABS DERF DMIN1 IDINT
DACOS DEXP DMOD MAX0
DASIN DFLOAT DSIN MIN0
DATAN DGAMMA DSINH MOD
DATAN2 DLGAMA DSQRT
DCOS DLOG DTAN
DCOSH DLOG10 DTANH
DCOTAN DMAX1 IABS
• You can also use the equivalent single precision or
generic function names. But, Aspen Plus always
performs double precision calculations.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 183 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Statements Requiring Compilation
• The following statements require compilation:
CALL LOGICAL
CHARACTER PARAMETER
COMMON PRINT
COMPLEX RETURN
DATA READ
ENTRY STOP
EQUIVALENCE SUBROUTINE
IMPLICIT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 184 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Using Fortran Blocks
1. Access flowsheet variables to be used within Fortran
- All flowsheet quantities that must be either read from
or written to, must be identified (Fortran Input Define
sheet).
2. Write Fortran
- Includes both non-executable (COMMON,
EQUIVALENCE, etc) Fortran (Fortran Input
Declarations sheet) and executable Fortran (Fortran
Input Fortran sheet) to achieve desired result.
3. Specify location of Fortran block in execution sequence
(Fortran Input Sequence sheet)
- Specify directly, or
- Specify with read and write variables
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 185 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes
1. Only quantities that have been input to the flowsheet
should be overwritten.
2. The rules for writing In-Line Fortran are as follows:
a. The Fortran code must begin in column 7 or beyond.
b. Comment lines must have the letter “C” or a “ ; ” in
the first column.
c. Column two must be blank.
3. Variable names should not begin with lZ or ZZ.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 186 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes (Continued)
4. On the Fortran Input Sequence sheet, the preferred way
to specify where the Fortran block should be executed is
to list the read and write variables.
5. When using the Fortran WRITE statement, you can use
the predefined unit number NTERM to write to the control
panel. For example,
write(NTERM,*) flow
OR
write(NTERM,10) flow
10 format(‘Feed flowrate =‘,G12.5)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 187 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Fortran Workshop
In a methane reformer, hydrogen gas is produced by reacting methane
with water, generating carbon monoxide as a by-product. The reaction
taking place is the following:
The feed to the reformer consists of pure methane and water streams.
These are mixed and heated prior to being fed to the reformer. The
conversion of methane is 99.5%, and the molar ratio of methane to
water in the feed is 1:4.
Create a flowsheet as shown in the diagram on the following slide. Set
up a Sensitivity block and plot a graph showing the variation of reactor
duty as the methane flowrate in the feed is varied from 100 to 500
lbmol/hr.
Note: The methane:water ratio in the feed must be maintained
constant for each Sensitivity case. (Hint: This can be
achieved using a Fortran Block.)
Objective: Use a Fortran Block to maintain the methane:water
ratio in the feed to a reactor.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 188 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Fortran Workshop (Continued)
CH
4
+ H
2
O = 3 H
2
+ CO
Methane Water Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide
Temperature = 150 F
Pressure = 900 psia
Temperature = 70 F
Pressure = 15 psia
Temperature = 1100 F
Pressure = 850 psia
Temperature = 1450 F
Pressure Drop = 20 psi
CH4 conversion = 0.995
Use the Peng-Robinson Property Method
When finished, save as
filename: Fortran.BKP
MIX
CH4
H2O
RXIN
REFORMER
RXOUT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 189 Introduction to Aspen Plus
190 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Windows Interoperability
Objective:
Introduce the use of windows interoperability to transfer
data easily to and from other Windows programs.
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 37, Working with Other Windows Programs
• User Guide, Chapter 38, Using the Aspen Plus ActiveX Automation
Server
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 191 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Windows Interoperability
• Copying and pasting simulation data into spreadsheets
or reports
• Copying and pasting flowsheet graphics and plots into
reports
• Creating active links between Aspen Plus and other
Windows applications
• OLE embedding
• ActiveX automation
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 192 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Windows Interoperability - Examples
• Copy simulation results such as column profiles and
stream results into
- Spreadsheet for further analysis
- Word processor for reports and documentation
- Design program
- Database for case storage and management
• Copy flowsheet graphics and plots into
- Word processor for reports
- Slide making program for presentations
• Copy tabular data from spreadsheets into Aspen Plus
for Data Regression, Data-Fit, etc.
• Copy plots or tables into the Process Flowsheet
Window.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 193 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Benefits of Windows Interoperability
• Benefits of Copy/Paste/Paste Link
- Live data links can be established that update these
applications as the process model is changed to
automatically propagate results of engineering
changes.
- The benefits to the engineer are quick and error-free
data transfer and consistent engineering results
throughout the engineering work process.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 194 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Using Copy and Paste
1. Select
Select the data fields or the graphical objects.
- Multiple fields of data or objects can be selected by
holding down the CTRL key while clicking the mouse
on the fields.
- Columns of data can be selected by clicking the
column heading, or an entire grid can be selected by
clicking on the top left cell.
2. Copy
Choose Copy from the Edit menu or type CTRL-C.
3. Paste
Click the mouse in the input field where you want the
information and choose Paste from the Edit menu or
click CTRL-V.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 195 Introduction to Aspen Plus
OLE Embedding
• What is OLE embedding?
- Applications can be used within applications.
• Uses of OLE embedding
- Aspen Plus as the OLE server: Aspen Plus
flowsheet graphics can be embedded into a report
document, or stream data into a CAD drawing. The
simulation model is actually contained in the
document, and could be delivered directly with that
document.
- Aspen Plus as the OLE container: Other windows
applications can be embedded within the Aspen
Plus simulation.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 196 Introduction to Aspen Plus
OLE Embedding (Continued)
• Examples of OLE embedding
- OLE server: If the recipient of an engineering report,
for example, wanted to review the model
assumptions, he could access and run the
embedded Aspen Plus model directly from the report
document.
- OLE container: For example, Excel spreadsheets
and plots could be used to enhance Aspen Plus
flowsheet graphics.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 197 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Embedding Objects in the Flowsheet
• You can embed other applications as objects into the
Process Flowsheet window.
• You can do this in two ways:
- Using Copy and Paste
- Using the Insert dialog box
• You can edit the object embedded in the flowsheet by
double clicking on the object to edit it inside Aspen Plus.
• You can also move, resize or attach the object to a block
or stream in the flowsheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 198 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Copy and Paste Workshop 1
• Use the Cyclohexane flowsheet workshop (saved as
CYCLOHEX.BKP)
• Copy the temperature profile from COLUMN into a
spreadsheet.
• Generate a plot of the temperature using the plot wizard
and copy and paste the plot into the spreadsheet.
• Save the spreadsheet as CYCLOHEX-result.xls
Objective: Use copy and paste to copy and paste the
stage temperatures into a spreadsheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 199 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Copy and Paste Workshop 2
• Use the Cyclohexane flowsheet workshop (saved as
CYCLOHEX.BKP)
• Copy the stream results from stream RXIN into the input
form.
- Copy the compositions, the temperature and the
pressure separately.
Note: Reinitialize before running the simulation in order to
see how many iterations are needed before and after the
estimate is added.
Objective: Use copy and paste to copy the stream
results to a stream input form.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 200 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Creating Active Links
• When copying and pasting information, you can create
active links between input or results fields in Aspen
Plus and other applications such as Word and Excel.
• The links update these applications as the process
model is modified to automatically propagate results of
engineering changes.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 201 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Creating Active Links
1. Open both applications.
2. Select the data (or object) that you want to paste and
link.
3. Choose Copy from the Edit menu.
4. In the location where you want to paste the link, choose
Paste Special from the Edit menu.
5. In the Paste Special dialog box, click the Paste Link
radio button.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 202 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Paste Link Demonstration
Objective: Create an active link from Aspen Plus
Results into a spreadsheet.
• Start with the cumene flowsheet demonstration.
• Open a spreadsheet and create a cell with the
temperature for the cooler in it.
• Copy and paste the link into the Aspen Plus flowsheet.
• Copy and paste a link with the flow and composition of
cumene in the product stream into the spreadsheet.
• Change the temperature in the spreadsheet and then
rerun the flowsheet. Notice the changes.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 203 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Paste Link Workshop
Objective: Create an active link from Aspen Plus results
into a spreadsheet
• Use the Cyclohexane flowsheet workshop (saved as
CYCLOHEX.BKP)
• Copy the Condenser and Reboiler duty results from the
RadFrac COLUMN Summary sheet. Use Copy with Format
and copy the value, the label and the units.
• Paste the results into the CYCLOHEX-results.xls spreadsheet
as a link. Use Paste Special and choose Link.
• Change the Reflux ratio in the column to 2 and rerun the
flowsheet. Check the spreadsheet to see that the results have
changed there also. Notice that the temperature profile results
have not changed since they were not pasted as a link.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 204 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Saving Files with Active Links
• Be sure to save both the link source file and the link
container file.
• If you save the link source with a different name, you
must save the link container after saving the link
source.
• If you have active links in both directions between the
two applications and you change the name of both files,
you must do three Save operations:
- Save the first application with a new name.
- Save the second application with a new name.
- Save the first application again.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 205 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Running Files with Active Links
• When you open the link source file, there is nothing
special that you need to do.
• When you open the link container file, you will usually
see a dialog box asking you if you want to re-establish
the links. You can select Yes or No.
• To make a link source application visible:
- Select Links, from the Edit menu in Aspen Plus.
- In the Links dialog box, select the source file and
click Open Source.
(Note: The Process Flowsheet must be the active
window. Links is not an option on the Edit menu if
the Data Browser is active.)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 206 Introduction to Aspen Plus
ActiveX Automation
• What is ActiveX automation?
- Other programs such as Visual Basic or C++ can be
used to control a simulation.
• Uses of ActiveX automation
- Visual Basic or C++ can be written to access and
control process models using a documented
interface syntax.
- Custom applications can be built on top of process
models.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 207 Introduction to Aspen Plus
OLE Automation (Continued)
• Benefits of ActiveX automation
- A model developer in the Process Engineering
department could develop a customized Excel
interface to an Aspen Plus model for plant operators,
using the Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) macro
language.
- A customer might write a top-level C++ program that
• pulls data from a process model
• uses that data to automatically generate custom
spec sheets
• populates a process engineering database
• launches a third-party design program
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 208 Introduction to Aspen Plus
OLE Automation Demonstration
• Demonstration 1
- Simple run and reinit button are used in the butanol
flowsheet.
- Files: butanol-demo.xls and butanol.bkp
• Demonstration 2
- More elaborate Visual Basic code is used to create a
general heat exchanger spreadsheet that can
access the heat exchangers in any Aspen Plus
flowsheet.
- Files: olespecsheet.xls and heatx2.bkp
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 209 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Visual Basic Examples
» Located in the APUI100\VBExample directory
• Open - open existing simulation
• Run - changes a simulation parameter and re-runs the simulation
• ListBlocks - retrieves a list of blocks and their attributes
• Connectivity - displays a table showing flowsheet connectivity
• GetCollection - illustrates use of a collection object
• GetScalarValues - retrieves scalar variables from a block
• TempProf - retrieves values for a non-scalar variable with one identifier
• CompProf - retrieves values for a non-scalar variable with two identifiers
• ReacCoeff - retrieves values for a non-scalar variable with three identifiers
• UnitChange - shows changing the units of measurement of a variable
• UnitConversion - retrieves a value both in the display units (psi) and
alternative units (atm)
• UnitString - retrieves the units of measurement symbol for a variable
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 210 Introduction to Aspen Plus
211 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Heat Exchangers
Objective:
Introduce the unit operation models used for heat
exchangers and heaters.
Aspen Plus References:
• Unit Operation Models Reference Manual, Chapter 3,
Heat Exchangers
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 212 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heat Exchanger Blocks
• Heater - Heater or cooler
• HeatX - Two stream heat exchanger
• MHeatX - Multi-stream heat exchanger
• Hetran - Interface to B-JAC Hetran block
• Aerotran - Interface to B-JAC Aerotran block
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 213 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the Heater Model
The Heater block mixes multiple inlet streams to produce a
single outlet stream at a specified thermodynamic state.
Heater can be used to represent:
- Heaters
- Coolers
- Valves
- Pumps (when work-related results are not needed)
- Compressors (when work-related results are not
needed)
Heater can also be used to set the thermodynamic conditions
of a stream.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 214 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heater Input Specifications
Allowed combinations:
• Pressure (or Pressure drop) and one of:
- Outlet temperature
- Heat duty or inlet heat stream
- Vapor fraction
- Temperature change
- Degrees of subcooling or superheating
• Outlet Temperature or Temperature change and one of:
- Pressure
- Heat Duty
- Vapor fraction
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 215 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heater Input Specifications (Continued)
For single phase use Pressure (drop) and one of:
- Outlet temperature
- Heat duty or inlet heat stream
- Temperature change
Vapor fraction of 1 means dew point condition,
0 means bubble point
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 216 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heat Streams
• Any number of inlet heat streams can be specified for a
Heater.
• One outlet heat stream can be specified for the net heat
load from a Heater.
• The net heat load is the sum of the inlet heat streams
minus the actual (calculated) heat duty.
• If you give only one specification (temperature or
pressure), Heater uses the sum of the inlet heat
streams as a duty specification.
• If you give two specifications, Heater uses the heat
streams only to calculate the net heat duty.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 217 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the HeatX Model
• HeatX can perform simplified or rigorous rating
calculations.
• Simplified rating calculations (heat and material
balance calculations) can be performed if exchanger
geometry is unknown or unimportant.
• For rigorous heat transfer and pressure drop
calculations, the heat exchanger geometry must be
specified.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 218 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the HeatX Model (Continued)
HeatX can model shell-and-tube exchanger types:
- Counter-current and co-current
- Segmental baffle TEMA E, F, G, H, J and X shells
- Rod baffle TEMA E and F shells
- Bare and low-finned tubes
HeatX performs:
- Full zone analysis
- Heat transfer and pressure drop calculations
- Sensible heat, nucleate boiling, condensation
film coefficient calculations
- Built-in or user specified correlations
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 219 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the HeatX Model (Continued)
HeatX cannot:
• Perform design calculations
• Perform mechanical vibration analysis
• Estimate fouling factors
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 220 Introduction to Aspen Plus
HeatX Input Specifications
Select one of the following specifications:
• Heat transfer area or Geometry
• Exchanger duty
• For hot or cold outlet stream:
- Temperature
- Temperature change
- Temperature approach
- Degrees of superheating / subcooling
- Vapor fraction
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 221 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the MHeatX Model
• MHeatX can be used to represent heat transfer
between multiple hot and cold streams.
• Detailed, rigorous internal zone analysis can be
performed to determine pinch points.
• MHeatX uses multiple Heater blocks and heat streams
to enhance flowsheet convergence.
• Two-stream heat exchangers can also be modeled
using MHeatX.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 222 Introduction to Aspen Plus
HeatX versus Heater
Consider the following:
• Use HeatX when both sides are important.
• Use Heater when one side (e.g. the utility) is not
important.
• Use two Heaters (coupled by heat stream, Fortran
block or design spec) or an MHeatX to avoid flowsheet
complexity created by HeatX.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 223 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Two Heaters versus One HeatX
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 224 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with Hetran and Aerotran
• The Hetran block is the interface to the B-JAC Hetran
program for designing and simulating shell and tube
heat exchangers.
• The Aerotran block is the interface to the B-JAC
Aerotran program for designing and simulating air-
cooled heat exchangers.
• Information related to the heat exchanger configuration
and geometry is entered through the Hetran or Aerotran
standalone program interface.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 225 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heat Curves
All of the heat exchanger models are able to calculate
Heat Curves (Hcurves).
Tables can be generated for various independent
variables (typically duty or temperature) for any
property that Aspen Plus can generate.
These tables can be printed, plotted, or exported for use
with other heat exchanger design software.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 226 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heat Curves Tabular Results
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 227 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Heat Curve Plot
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 228 Introduction to Aspen Plus
HeatX Workshop
• Hydrocarbon stream
- Temperature: 200 C
- Pressure: 4 bar
- Flowrate: 10000 kg/hr
- Composition: 50 wt% benzene, 20% styrene,
20% ethylbenzene and 10% water
• Cooling water
- Temperature: 20 C
- Pressure: 10 bar
- Flow rate: 60000 kg/hr
- Composition: 100% water
Objective: Compare the simulation of a heat exchanger
that uses water to cool a hydrocarbon mixture using three
methods: a shortcut HeatX, a rigorous HeatX and two
Heaters connected with a Heat stream.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 229 Introduction to Aspen Plus
HeatX Workshop (Continued)
RHEATX
RHOT-IN
RCLD-IN RCLD-OUT
RHOT-OUT
SHEATX
SHOT-IN
SCLD-IN SCLD-OUT
SHOT-OUT
HEATER-1
HCLD-IN
Q-TRANS
HCLD-OUT
HEATER-2
HHOT-IN HHOT-OUT
Use the NRTL-RK Property Method for the hydrocarbon streams.
Specify that the valid phases for the hydrocarbon stream is Vapor-Liquid-Liquid.
Specify that the Steam Tables are used to calculate the properties for the cooling water
streams on the Block BlockOptions Properties sheet.
Start with the General with Metric Units Template.
When finished, save as filename: HEATX.BKP
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 230 Introduction to Aspen Plus
HeatX Workshop (Continued)
• Shortcut HeatX simulation:
- Hydrocarbon stream exit has a vapor fraction of 0
- No pressure drop in either stream
• Two Heaters simulation:
- Use the same specifications as the shortcut HeatX simulation
• Rigorous HeatX simulation:
- Hydrocarbons in shell leave with a vapor fraction of 0
- Shell diameter 1 m, 1 tube pass
- 300 bare tubes, 3 m length, pitch 31 mm, 21 mm ID, 25 mm OD
- All nozzles 100 mm
- 5 baffles, 15% cut
- Create heat curves containing all info required for thermal design.
- Change the heat exchanger specification to Geometry and re-run.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 231 Introduction to Aspen Plus
232 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Pressure Changers
Objective:
Introduce the unit operation models used to change
pressure: pumps, compressors, and models for
calculating pressure change through pipes and valves.
Aspen Plus References:
• Unit Operation Models Reference Manual, Chapter 6, Pressure
Changers
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 233 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Pressure Changer Blocks
• Pump - Pump or hydraulic turbine
• Compr - Compressor or turbine
• MCompr - Multi-stage compressor or turbine
• Valve - Control valve
• Pipe - Single-segment pipe
• Pipeline - Multi-segment pipe
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 234 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the Pump Model
• The Pump block can be used to simulate:
- Pumps
- Hydraulic turbines
• Power requirement is calculated or input.
• A Heater model can be used for pressure change
calculations only.
• Pump is designed to handle a single liquid phase.
• Vapor-liquid or vapor-liquid-liquid calculations can be
specified to check outlet stream phases.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 235 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Pump Performance Curves
• Rating can be done by specifying scalar parameters or
a pump performance curve.
• Specify:
- Dimensional curves
• Head versus flow
• Power versus flow
- Dimensionless curves:
• Head coefficient versus flow coefficient
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 236 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the Compr Model
• The Compr block can be used to simulate:
- Polytropic centrifugal compressor
- Polytropic positive displacement compressor
- Isentropic compressor
- Isentropic turbine
• MCompr is used for multi-stage compressors.
• Power requirement is calculated or input.
• A Heater model can be used for pressure change
calculations only.
• Compr is designed to handle both single and multiple
phase calculations.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 237 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the MCompr Model
• The MCompr block can be used to simulate:
- Multi-stage polytropic centrifugal compressor
- Multi-stage polytropic positive displacement compressor
- Multi-stage isentropic compressor
- Multi-stage isentropic turbine
• MCompr can have an intercooler between each stage, and
an aftercooler after the last stage.
- You can perform one-, two-, or three- phase flash
calculations in the intercoolers.
- Each cooler can have a liquid knockout stream, except
the cooler after the last stage.
- Intercooler specifications apply to all subsequent
coolers.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 238 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Compressor Performance Curves
• Rating can be done by specifying a compressor
performance curve.
• Specify:
- Dimensional curves
• Head versus flow
• Power versus flow
- Dimensionless curves:
• Head coefficient versus flow coefficient
• Compr cannot handle performance curves for a turbine.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 239 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Work Streams
• Any number of inlet work streams can be specified for
pumps and compressors.
• One outlet work stream can be specified for the net
work load from pumps or compressors.
• The net work load is the sum of the inlet work streams
minus the actual (calculated) work.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 240 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the Valve Model
• The Valve block can be used to simulate:
- Control valves
- Pressure drop
• The pressure drop across a valve is related to the valve
flow coefficient.
• Flow is assumed to be adiabatic.
• Valve can perform single or multiple phase calculations.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 241 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the Valve Model (Continued)
• The effect of head loss from pipe fittings can be included.
• There are three types of calculations:
- Adiabatic flash for specified outlet pressure (pressure
changer)
- Calculate valve flow coefficient for specified outlet
pressure (design)
- Calculate outlet pressure for specified valve (rating)
• Valve can check for choked flow.
• Cavitation index can be calculated.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 242 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Working with the Pipe Model
• The Pipe block calculates the pressure drop and heat
transfer in a single pipe segment.
• The Pipeline block can be used for a multiple-segment
pipe.
• Pipe can perform single or multiple phase calculations.
• If the inlet pressure is known, Pipe calculates the outlet
pressure.
• If the outlet pressure is known, Pipe calculates the inlet
pressure and updates the state variables of the inlet
stream.
• Entrance effects are not modeled.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 243 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Pressure Changers Block Example
Add a Compressor and a Valve to the cumene flowsheet.
Filename: CUMENE-P.BKP
REACTOR
FEED
RECYCLE
REAC-OUT
COOL
COOL-OUT
SEP
PRODUCT
COMPR
RECYCLE2
VALVE
RECYCLE3 Outlet Pressure = 3 psig
Polytropic compressor model
using GPSA method
Discharge pressure = 5 psig
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 244 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Pressure Changers Workshop
• Start with the Cyclohexane Workshop flowsheet
(CYCLOHEX.BKP)
Objective: Add pressure changer unit operations to the
Cyclohexane flowsheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 245 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Pressure Changers Workshop (Continued)
FEED-MIX
H2IN
CHRCY3
H2RCY2
BZIN2
RXIN
REACT
RXOUT
HP-SEP
LIQ
VAP
COLUMN
COLFD
LTENDS
PRODUCT
VFLOW
H2RCY
PURGE
LFLOW
CHRCY
PUMP
CHRCY2
PIPE
COMP
FEEDPUMP
BZIN
VALVE
PURGE2
When finished, save as
filename: PRESCHNG.BKP
Pump efficiency = 0.6
Driver efficiency = 0.9
Performance Curve
Head Flow
[m] [cum/hr]
40 20
250 10
300 5
400 3
Carbon Steel
Schedule 40
1-in diameter
25-m length
26 bar outlet pressure
20 bar outlet pressure
Globe valve
V810 equal percent flow
1.5-in size
Isentropic
4 bar pressure change
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 246 Introduction to Aspen Plus
247 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Flowsheet Convergence
Objective:
Introduce the idea of convergence blocks, tear streams
and flowsheet sequences
Aspen Plus References:
•User Guide, Chapter 17, Convergence
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 248 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Convergence Blocks
• Every design specification and tear stream has an
associated convergence block.
• Convergence blocks determine how guesses for a tear
stream or design specification manipulated variable are
updated from iteration to iteration.
• Aspen Plus-defined convergence block names begin with
the character “$.”
- User defined convergence block names must not begin
with the character “$.”
• To determine the convergence blocks defined by Aspen
Plus, look under the “Flowsheet Analysis” section in the
Control Panel messages.
• User convergence blocks can be specified under
/Data/Convergence/Convergence...
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 249 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Convergence Block Types
• Different types of convergence blocks are used for different
purposes:
To converge tear streams:
• WEGSTEIN
• DIRECT
• BROYDEN
• NEWTON
To converge design specifications:
• SECANT
• BROYDEN
• NEWTON
To converge design specifications and tear streams:
• BROYDEN
• NEWTON
For optimization:
• SQP
• COMPLEX
• Global convergence options can be specified on the Convergence
ConvOptions Defaults form.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 250 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Flowsheet Sequence
• To determine the flowsheet sequence calculated by
Aspen Plus, look under the “COMPUTATION ORDER
FOR THE FLOWSHEET” section in the Control Panel, or
on the left-hand pane of the Control Panel window.
• User-determined sequences can be specified on the
Convergence Sequence form.
• User-specified sequences can be either full or partial.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 251 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Tear Streams
• Which are the recycle streams?
• Which are the possible tear streams?
• A tear stream is one for which Aspen Plus makes an initial
guess, and iteratively updates the guess until two
consecutive guesses are within a specified tolerance.
• Tear streams are related to, but not the same as recycle
streams.
S1 S2 S3
S6
S4
S7
S5
MIXER
B1
MIXER
B2
FSPLIT
B3
FSPLIT
B4
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 252 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Tear Streams (Continued)
• To determine the tear streams chosen by Aspen Plus,
look under the “Flowsheet Analysis” section in the Control
Panel.
• User-determined tear streams can be specified on the
Convergence Tear form.
• Providing estimates for tear streams can facilitate or
speed up flowsheet convergence (highly recommended,
otherwise the default is zero).
• If you enter information for a stream that is in a “loop,”
Aspen Plus will automatically try to choose that stream to
be a tear stream.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 253 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Reconciling Streams
• Simulation results for a stream can be copied onto the
its input form.
• Select a stream on the flowsheet, click the right mouse
button and select “Reconcile” from the list to copy
stream results to the input form.
- Two state variables must be selected for the stream
flash calculation.
- Component flows, or component fractions and total
flow can be copied.
- Mole, mass, or standard liquid volume basis can be
selected.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 254 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Convergence Workshop
Objective: Converge this flowsheet.
Start with the file CONVERGE.BKP.
LIQ
VAPOR
FEED-HT
FEED
BOT
DIST
BOT-COOL
GLYCOL
COLUMN
PREHEATR
PREFLASH
T=165 F
P=15 psia
100 lbmol/hr
XH20 = 0.4
XMethanol = 0.3
XEthanol = 0.3
Area = 65 sqft
DP=0
Q=0
Theoretical Stages = 10
Reflux Ratio = 5
Distillate to Feed Ratio = 0.2
Feed Stage = 5
Column Pressure = 1 atm
Total Condenser
Use NRTL-RK Property Method
T=70 F
P=35 psia
50 lbmol/hr Ethylene Glycol
When finished, save as
filename: CONV-R.BKP
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 255 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Convergence Workshop (Continued)
Hints for Convergence Workshop:
Questions to ask yourself:
- What messages are displayed in the control panel?
- Why do some of the blocks show zero flow?
- What is the Aspen Plus-generated execution sequence for the
flowsheet?
- Which stream does Aspen Plus choose as a tear stream?
- What are other possible tear streams?
Recommendation: Give initial estimates for a tear stream.
- Of the three possible tear streams you could choose, which do
you know the most about? (Note: If you enter information for a
stream that is in a “loop,” Aspen Plus will automatically choose
that stream to be a tear stream and set up a convergence block
for it.)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 256 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Convergence Workshop (Continued)
Questions to ask yourself:
- Does the flowsheet converge after entering initial estimates for
the tear stream?
- If not, why not? (see control panel)
- How is the err/tol value behaving, and what is its value at the
end of the run?
- Does it appear that increasing the number of convergence
iterations will help?
- What else can be tried to improve this convergence?
Recommendation: Try a different convergence algorithm (e.g. Direct,
Broyden, or Newton).
Note: You can either manually create a convergence block to converge
the tear stream of your choice, or you can change the default
convergence method for all tear streams on the Convergence
Conv Options Defaults Default Methods sheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 257 Introduction to Aspen Plus
258 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop
Objective:
Practice and apply many of the techniques used in this
course and learn how to best approach modeling
projects
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 259 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop
Objective: Model a methanol plant.
The process being modeled is a methanol plant. The
basic feed streams to the plant are Natural Gas, Carbon
Dioxide (assumed to be taken from a nearby Ammonia
Plant) and Water. The aim is to achieve the methanol
production rate of approximately 62,000 kg/hr, at a purity
of at least 99.95 % wt.
This is a large flowsheet that would take an experienced
engineer more than an afternoon to complete. Start
building the flowsheet and think about how you would
work to complete the project.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 260 Introduction to Aspen Plus
General Guidelines
• Build the flowsheet one section at a time.
• Simplify whenever possible. Complexity can always be
added later.
• Investigate the physical properties.
- Use Analysis.
- Check if binary parameters are available.
- Check for two liquid phases.
- Use an appropriate equation of state for the portions of
the flowsheet involving gases and use an activity
coefficient model for the sections where non-ideal
liquids may be present.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 261 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop
FURNACE
Fuel
Air
MEOHRXR
SPLIT1
MIX2
E121
COOL4
FL3
SYNCOMP
FL1
FL2
COOL1
COOL3
COOL2
BOILER
E122
CIRC
E124
E223
FL4
SPLIT2
FL5
M4
MKWATER
TOPPING
REFINING
M2
SATURATE
FEEDHTR
REFORMER
NATGAS
H2OCIRC
MKUPST
CH4COMP
CO2
CO2COMP
M1
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 262 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 1: Front-End Section
M2
SATURATE
FEEDHTR
REFORMER
NATGAS
H2OCIRC
MKUPST
CH4COMP
CO2
CO2COMP
From Furnace
To BOILER
M1
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 263 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 1: Front-End Section (Continued)
1. Front-end Section
Carbon Dioxide Stream – CO2
• Temperature = 43 C
• Pressure = 1.4 bar
• Flow = 24823 kg/hr
• Mole Fraction
- CO2 - 0.9253
- H2 - 0.0094
- H2O - 0.0606
- CH4 - 0.0019
- N2 - 0.0028
Natural Gas Stream - NATGAS
• Temperature = 26 C
• Pressure = 21.7 bar
• Flow = 29952 kg/hr
• Mole Fraction
- CO2 - 0.0059
- CH4 - 0.9539
- N2 - 0.0008
- C2H6 - 0.0391
- C3H8 - 0.0003
Circulation Water - H2OCIRC
• Pure water stream
• Flow = 410000 kg/hr
• Temperature = 195 C
• Pressure = 26 bar
Makeup Steam - MKUPST
• Stream of pure steam
• Flow = 40000 kg/hr
• Pressure = 26 bar
• Vapor Fraction = 1
• Adjust the makeup steam flow to achieve a
desired steam to methane molar ratio of 2.8 in
the Reformer feed REFFEED.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 264 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 1: Front-End Section (Continued)
Carbon Dioxide Compressor - CO2COMP
• Discharge Pressure = 27.5 bar
• Compressor Type = 2 stage
Natural Gas Compressor - CH4COMP
• Discharge Pressure = 27.5 bar
• Compressor Type = single stage
Reformer Process Side Feed Stream Pre-Heater - FEEDHTR
• Exit Temperature = 560 C
• Pressure drop = 0
Saturation Column - SATURATE
• 1.5 inch metal pall ring packing.
• Estimated HETP = 10 x 1.5 inches = 381 mm
• Height of Packing = 15 meters
• No condenser and no reboiler.
Reformer Reactor - REFORMER
• Consists of two parts: the Furnace portion and the Steam Reforming portion
• Exit Temperature of the Steam Reforming portion = 860 C
• Pressure = 18 bar
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 265 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 1: Front-End Section Check
Reformer Product
Temperature C 860
Pressure bar 18
Vapor Frac 1
Mole Flow kmol/hr 10266.6541
Mass Flow kg/hr 139696.964
Volume Flow cum/hr 53937.9538
Enthalpy MMkcal/hr -213.933793
Mole Flow kmol/hr
CO 1381.68394
CO2 751.335833
H2 4882.77068
WATER 2989.25863
METHANOL 0.000686384
METHANE 258.513276
NITROGEN 3.08402321
BUTANOL 0
DME (DIMETHYLETHER) 2.06E-10
ACETONE 2.18E-08
OXYGEN 1.80E-15
ETHANE 0.007007476
PROPANE 6.74097E-07
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 266 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 2: Heat Recovery Section
COOL4
FL3
SYNCOMP
FL1
FL2
COOL1
COOL3
COOL2
BOILER
To TOPPING
To REFINING
To Methanol Loop
From Reformer
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 267 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 2: Heat Recovery Section (Continued)
2. Heat Recovery Section
• This section consists of a series of heat exchangers and flash vessels used to recover the available
energy and water in the Reformed Gas stream.
BOILER
• Exit temperature = 166 C
• Exit Pressure= 18 bar
COOL1
• Exit temperature = 136 C
• Exit Pressure = 18 bar
COOL2
• Exit temperature = 104 C
• Exit Pressure = 17.9 bar
COOL3
• Exit temperature = 85 C
• Pressure Drop = 0.1 bar
COOL4
• Exit temperature = 40 C
• Exit Pressure = 17.6 bar
FL1
• Pressure Drop = 0 bar
• Heat Duty = 0 MMkcal/hr
FL2
• Exit Pressure = 17.7 bar
• Heat Duty = 0 MMkcal/hr
FL3
• Exit Pressure = 17.4 bar
• Heat Duty = 0 MMkcal/hr
SYNCOM
• Two Stage Polytropic compressor
• Discharge Pressure = 82.5 bar
• Intercooler Exit Temperature = 40 C
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 268 Introduction to Aspen Plus
To Methanol Loop
Temperature C 40.0
Pressure bar 82.50
Vapor Frac 0.997465769
Mole Flow kmol/hr 7302.28917
Part 2: Heat Recovery Section Check
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 269 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section
MEOHRXR
SPLIT1
MIX2
E121
From SYNCOMP
E122
CIRC
E124
E223
FL4
SPLIT2
To Furnace
To FL5
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 270 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section (Continued)
3. Methanol Synthesis Loop Section
Methanol Reactor - MEOHRXR
• Tube cooled reactor
• Exit Temperature from the tubes = 240 C
• No pressure drop across the reactor
• Reactions
− CO + H2O <-> CO2 + H2 (Equilibrium)
− CO2 + 3H2 <-> CH3OH + H2O (+15 C Temperature Approach)
− 2CH3OH <-> DIMETHYLETHER + H2O (Molar extent 0.2kmol/hr)
− 4CO + 8H2 <-> N-BUTANOL + 3H2O (Molar extent 0.8kmol/hr)
− 3CO + 5H2 <-> ACETONE + 2H2O (Molar extent 0.3kmol/hr)
E121
• Exit Temperature - 150 C
• Exit Pressure - 81 bar
E122
• Cold Side Exit Temperature - 120 C
E223
• Exit Temperature - 60 C
• Exit Pressure - 77.3 bar
E124
• Exit Temperature - 45 C
• Exit Pressure - 75.6 bar
FL4
• Exit Pressure = 75.6 bar
• Heat Duty = 0 MMkcal/hr
CIRC
• Single stage compressor
• Discharge Pressure = 83 bar
• Discharge Temperature = 55 C
SPLIT1
• Split Fraction = 0.8 to stream to E121
SPLIT2
• Stream PURGE = 9000 kg/hr
• Stream RECYCLE = 326800 kg/hr
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 271 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section Check
To FL5
Temperature C 45.0
Pressure bar 75.60
Vapor Frac 0.000
Mole Flow kmol/hr 2673.354
MEOHRXR Product
Temperature C 249.7
Pressure bar 83.00
Vapor Frac 1.000
Mole Flow kmol/hr 29091.739
Mass Flow kg/hr 413083.791
Volume Flow cum/hr 15637.807
Enthalpy MMkcal/hr -559.129
Mole Flow kmol/hr
CO 799.563
CO2 3137.144
H2 13379.353
WATER 644.301
METHANOL 2140.046
METHANE 8896.430
NITROGEN 91.428
BUTANOL 0.845
DME 1.864
ACETONE 0.588
OXYGEN 0.000
ETHANE 0.177
PROPANE 0.000
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 272 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 4: Distillation Section
FL5
M4
MKWATER
TOPPING
REFINING
From COOL2
To Furnace
From COOL1
From FL4
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 273 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 4: Distillation Section (Continued)
4. Distillation Section
Makeup Steam - MKWATER
• Stream of pure water
• Flow = 10000 kg/hr
• Pressure = 5 bar
• Temperature = 40 C
• Adjust the make-up water flow (stream MKWATER) to the CRUDE stream to achieve a stream
composition of 23 wt.% of water in the stream feeding the Topping column (stream TOPFEED) to
achieve 100 ppm methanol in the Refining column BTMS stream.
Topping Column - TOPPING
• Number of Stages = 51 (including condenser and reboiler)
• Condenser Type = Partial Vapor/Liquid
• Feed stage = 14
• Distillate has both liquid and vapor streams
• Distillate rate = 1400 kg/hr
• Pressure profile: stage 1 = 1.5 bar and stage 51 = 1.8 bar
• Distillate vapor fraction = 99 mol%
• Stage 2 heat duty = -7 Mmkcal/hr
• Stage 51 heat duty Specified by the heat stream
• Reboiler heat duty is provided via a heat stream from block COOL2
• Boil-up Ratio is approximately 0.52
• Valve trays
• The column has two condensers. To represent the liquid flow connections a pumparound can be
used between stage 1 and 3.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 274 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 4: Distillation Section (Continued)
Distillation Section (Continued)
Refining Column - REFINING
• Number of Stages = 95 (including condenser and reboiler)
• Condenser Type = Total
• Distillate Rate = 1 kg/hr
• Feed stage = 60
• Liquid Product sidedraw from Stage 4 @ 62000 kg/hr (Stream name – PRODUCT)
• Liquid Product sidedraw from Stage 83 @ 550 kg/hr (Stream name – FUSELOIL)
• Reflux rate = 188765 kg/hr
• Pressure profile: stage 1= 1.5bar and stage 95=2bar
• Reboiler heat duty is provided via a conventional reboiler supplemented by a heat stream from a
heater block to stage 95
• Boil-up Ratio is approximately 4.8
• Valve trays
• To meet environmental regulations, the bottoms stream must contain no more than 100ppm by
weight of methanol as this stream is to be dumped to a nearby river.
FL5
• Exit Pressure 5 bar
• Heat Duty 0 MMkcal/hr
M4
• For water addition to the crude methanol
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 275 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 4: Distillation Section Check
TOPFEED LTENDS SECPURGE REFINE PRODUCT BTMS LIQPURGE FUSELOIL
Temperature C 43.8 33.1 33.1 85.8 75.1 120.1 74.8 90.4
Pressure bar 5.00 1.50 1.50 1.80 1.52 2.00 1.50 1.95
Vapor Frac 0.001 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Mole Flow kmol/hr 3029.767 33.807 0.341 2995.618 1928.736 1047.117 0.031 19.733
Mass Flow kg/hr 82623.475 1388.896 11.104 81223.475 61800.974 18871.500 1.000 550.000
Volume Flow cum/hr 111.175 573.782 0.014 107.201 83.975 21.058 0.001 0.722
Enthalpy MMkcal/hr -186.388 -2.802 -0.020 -178.587 -107.391 -69.633 -0.002 -1.199
Mole Flow kmol/hr
CO 0.004 0.004 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
CO2 26.537 26.535 0.002 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
H2 0.014 0.014 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
WATER 1054.851 0.000 0.000 1054.851 0.000 1046.942 0.000 7.910
METHANOL 1945.891 5.591 0.334 1939.966 1928.733 0.059 0.031 11.143
METHANE 1.267 1.267 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
NITROGEN 0.003 0.003 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
BUTANOL 0.798 0.000 0.000 0.798 0.000 0.117 0.000 0.681
DME 0.116 0.116 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ACETONE 0.285 0.276 0.005 0.004 0.004 0.000 0.000 0.000
OXYGEN 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ETHANE 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
PROPANE 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 276 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 5: Furnace Section
FURNACE
Fuel
Air
From FL5
From SPLIT2
To REFORMER
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 277 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Part 5: Furnace Section (Continued)
5. Furnace Section
Air to Furnace - AIR
• Temperature = 366 C
• Pressure = 1 atm
• Flow = 281946 kg/hr
• Adjust the air flow to achieve 2%(vol.) of oxygen in the FLUEGAS stream.
Fuel to Furnace - FUEL
• Flow = 9436 kg/hr
• Conditions and composition are the same as for the natural gas stream
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 278 Introduction to Aspen Plus
279 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Additional Topics
280 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Maintaining Aspen Plus Simulations
Objective:
Introduce how to store simulations and retrieve them
from your computer environment
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 15, Managing Your Files
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 281 Introduction to Aspen Plus
File Formats in Aspen Plus
File Type Extension Format Description
Document *.apw Binary
File containing simulation input and results and
intermediate convergence information
Backup *.bkp ASCII Archive file containing simulation input and
results
Template *.apt ASCII Template containing default inputs
Input *.inp Text Simulation input
Run Message *.cpm Text Calculation history shown in the Control Panel
History *.his Text Detailed calculation history and diagnostic
messages
Summary *.sum ASCII Simulation results
Problem
Definition
*.appdf Binary File containing arrays and intermediate
convergence information used in the simulation
calculations
Report *.rep Text Simulation report
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 282 Introduction to Aspen Plus
File Type Characteristics
• Binary files
- Operating system and version specific
- Not readable, not printable
• ASCII files
- Transferable between operating systems
- Upwardly compatible
- Contain no control characters, “readable”
- Not intended to be printed
• Text files
- Transferable between operating systems
- Upwardly compatible
- Readable, can be edited
- Intended to be printed
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 283 Introduction to Aspen Plus
How to Store a Simulation
Three ways to store simulations:
Document Backup Input
(*.apw) (*.bkp) (*.inp)
Simulation definition Yes Yes Yes
Convergence info Yes No No
Results Yes Yes No
Flowsheet Graphics Yes Yes Yes/No
User readable No No Yes
Open/save speed High Low Lowest
Space requirements High Low Lowest
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 284 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Template Files
Template files are used to set your personal preferences:
• Units of measurement
• Property sets for stream reports
• Composition basis
• Stream report format
• Global flow basis for input specifications
• Setting Free-Water option
• Selection for Stream-Class
• Property Method
• (Required) Component list
• Other application-specific defaults
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 285 Introduction to Aspen Plus
How to Create a Personal Template
• Any flowsheet (complete or incomplete) can be saved
as a template file.
• In order to have a personal template appear on the
Personal sheet of the New dialog box, simply put the
template file into the AP101\GUI\Templates\Personal
folder.
• The text on the Setup Specifications Description sheet
will appear in the Preview window when the template
file is selected in the New dialog box.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 286 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Maintaining Your Computer
• Aspen Plus 10 runs best on a healthy computer.
• Minimum RAM
• Having more is better -- if near minimum, avoid running
too many other programs along with Aspen Plus.
• Active links increase needed RAM.
GUI only GUI and
Engine
Win 95 and
Win 98
32 MB 64 MB
Windows NT 64 MB 96 MB
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 287 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Maintaining Your Hard Disk
• Keep plenty of free space on disk used for:
- Your Aspen working directory
- Windows swap files
• Delete unneeded files:
- Old .appdf, .his, etc.
- Aspen document files (*.apw) that aren’t active
- Aspen temporary files (_4404ydj.appdf, for example)
• Defragment regularly (once a week), even if Windows
says you don’t need to -- make the free space
contiguous.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 288 Introduction to Aspen Plus
289 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Customizing the Look of Your Flowsheet
Objective:
Introduce several ways of annotating your flowsheet to
create informative Process Flow Diagrams
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 14, Annotating Process Flowsheets
Related Topics:
• User Guide, Chapter 37, Working with Other Windows Programs
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 290 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Customizing the Process Flow Diagram
• Add annotations
- Text
- Graphics
- Tables
• Add OLE objects
- Add a titlebox
- Add plots or diagrams
• Display global data
- Stream flowrate, pressure and temperature
- Heat stream duty and work stream power
- Block duty and power
• Use PFD mode
- Change flowsheet connectivity
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 291 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Viewing
• Use the View menu to select the elements that you wish
to view:
- PFD Mode
- Global Data
- Annotation
- OLE Objects
• All of the elements can be turned on and off
independently.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 292 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Adding Annotation
• Use the Draw Toolbar to add text and graphics. (Select
Toolbar… from the View menu to select the Draw
Toolbar if it is not visible.)
• To create a stream table, click on the Stream Table
button on the Results Summary Streams Material
sheet.
• Annotation objects can be attached to flowsheet
elements such as streams or blocks.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 293 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Example of a Stream Table
Heat and Material Balance Table
Stream ID COOL-OUT FEED PRODUCT REAC-OUT RECYCLE
Temperature F 130.0 220.0 130.1 854.7 130.1
Pressure PSI 14.60 36.00 14.70 14.70 14.70
Vapor Frac 0.054 1.000 0.000 1.000 1.000
Mole Flow LBMOL/HR 44.342 80.000 41.983 44.342 2.359
Mass Flow LB/HR 4914.202 4807.771 4807.772 4914.202 106.431
Volume Flow CUFT/HR 1110.521 15648.095 93.470 42338.408 1003.782
Enthalpy MMBTU/HR -0.490 1.980 -0.513 2.003 0.023
Mole Flow LBMOL/HR
BENZENE 2.033 40.000 1.983 2.033 0.050
PROPYLEN 4.224 40.000 1.983 4.224 2.241
CUMENE 38.085 38.017 38.085 0.069
Mole Frac
BENZENE 0.046 0.500 0.047 0.046 0.021
PROPYLEN 0.095 0.500 0.047 0.095 0.950
CUMENE 0.859 0.906 0.859 0.029
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 294 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Adding Global Data
• On the Results View sheet when selecting Options from
the Tools menu, choose the block and stream results
that you want displayed as Global Data.
• Check Global Data on the View menu to display the
data on the flowsheet.
Temperature (F)
Pressure (psi)
Flow Rate (lb/hr)
Q Duty (Btu/hr)
REACTOR
Q=0
220
36
4808
FEED
130
15
106
RECYCLE
855
15
4914
REAC-OUT
COOL
Q=-2492499
130
15
4914
COOL-OUT
SEP
Q=0
130
15
4808
PRODUCT
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 295 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Using PFD Mode
• In this mode, you can add or delete unit operation icons
to the flowsheet for graphical purposes only.
• Using PFD mode means that you can change flowsheet
connectivity to match that of your plant.
• PFD-style drawing is completely separate from the
graphical simulation flowsheet. You must return to
simulation mode if you want to make a change to the
actual simulation flowsheet.
• PFD Mode is indicated by the Aqua border around the
flowsheet.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 296 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Examples of When to Use PFD Mode
• In the simulation flowsheet, it may be necessary to use
more than one unit operation block to model a single
piece of equipment in a plant.
- For example, a reactor with a liquid product and a vent may
need to be modeled using an RStoic reactor and a Flash2
block. In the report, only one unit operation icon is needed to
represent the unit in the plant.
• On the other hand, some pieces of equipment may not
need to be explicitly modeled in the simulation
flowsheet.
- For example, pumps are frequently not modeled in the
simulation flowsheet; the pressure change can be neglected or
included in another unit operation block.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 297 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Annotation Workshop
Part A:
Using the cyclohexane production Workshop (saved as
CYCLOHEX.BKP), display all stream and block global data.
Part B:
Add a title to the flowsheet diagram.
Part C:
Add a stream table to the flowsheet diagram.
Part D:
Using PFD Mode, add a pump for the BZIN stream for graphical
purposes only.
Objective: Use annotation to create a process flow diagram
for the cyclohexane flowsheet
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 298 Introduction to Aspen Plus
299 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Estimation of Physical Properties
Objectives:
Provide an overview of estimating physical property
parameters in Aspen Plus
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 30, Estimating Property Parameters
• Physical Property Methods and Models Reference Manual,
Chapter 8, Property Parameter Estimation
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 300 Introduction to Aspen Plus
What is Property Estimation?
• Property Estimation is a system to estimate parameters
required by physical property models. It can be used to
estimate:
- Pure component physical property constants
- Parameters for temperature-dependent models
- Binary interaction parameters for Wilson, NRTL and
UNIQUAC
- Group parameters for UNIFAC
• Estimations are based on group-contribution methods and
corresponding-states correlations.
• Experimental data can be incorporated into estimation.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 301 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Using Property Estimation
• Property Estimation can be used in two ways:
- On a stand-alone basis: Property Estimation Run Type
- Within another Run Type: Flowsheet, Property
Analysis, Data Regression, PROPERTIES PLUS or
Assay Data Analysis
• You can use Property Estimation to estimate properties for
both databank and non-databank components.
• Property Estimation information is accessed in the
Properties Estimation folder.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 302 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Estimation Methods and Requirements
• User Guide, Chapter 30, Estimating Property Parameters,
has a complete list of properties that can be estimated, as
well as the available estimation methods and their
respective requirements.
• This same information is also available under the on-line
help in the estimation forms.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 303 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps For Using Property Estimation
1. Define molecular structure on the Properties Molecular
Structure form.
2. Enter any experimental data using Parameters or Data
forms.
- Experimental data such as normal boiling point (TB)
is very important for many estimation methods. It
should be entered whenever possible.
3. Activate Property Estimation and choose property
estimation options on the Properties Estimation Input
form.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 304 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Defining Molecular Structure
• Molecular structure is required for all group-contribution
methods used in Property Estimation. You can:
- Define molecular structure in the general format and
allow Aspen Plus to determine functional groups,
or
- Define molecular structure in terms of functional
groups for particular methods
Reference: For a list of available group-contribution method functional
groups, see Aspen Plus Physical Property Data Reference Manual,
Chapter 3, Group Contribution Method Functional Groups.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 305 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps For Defining General Structure
1. Sketch the structure of the molecule on paper.
2. Assign a number to each atom, omitting hydrogen.
(The numbers must be consecutive starting with 1.)
3. Go to the Properties Molecular Structure Object
Manager, choose the component, and select Edit.
4. On the Molecular Structure General sheet, define the
molecule by its connectivity. Describe two atoms at a
time:
• Specify the types of atoms (C, O, S, …)
• Specify the type of bond that connects the two atoms
(single, double, …)
Note: If the molecule is a non-databank component, on the
Components Specifications form, enter a Component ID,
but do not enter a Component name or Formula.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 306 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Example of Defining Molecular Structure
• Example of defining molecular structure for isobutyl
alcohol using the general method
- Sketch the structure of the molecule, and assign a
number to each atom, omitting hydrogen.
C
2
C
1
C
4
C
3
O
5
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 307 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Example of Defining Molecular Structure
• Go to the Properties Molecular Structure Object Manager,
choose the component, and select Edit.
• On Properties Molecular Structure General sheet,
describe molecule by its connectivity, two atoms at a time.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 308 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Atom Types
• Current available atom types:
Atom Type Description Atom Type Description
C Carbon P Phosphorous
O Oxygen Zn Zinc
N Nitrogen Ga Gallium
S Sulfur Ge Germanium
B Boron As Arsenic
Si Silicon Cd Cadmium
F Fluorine Sn Tin
CL Chlorine Sb Antimony
Br Bromine Hg Mercury
I Iodine Pb Lead
Al Aluminum Bi Bismuth
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 309 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Bond Types
• Current available bond types:
- Single bond
- Double bond
- Triple bond
- Benzene ring
- Saturated 5-membered ring
- Saturated 6-membered ring
- Saturated 7-membered ring
- Saturated hydrocarbon chain
Note: You must assign consecutive atom numbers to
Benzene ring, Saturated 5-membered ring, Saturated 6-
membered ring, Saturated 7-membered ring, and
Saturated hydrocarbon chain bonds.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 310 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps For Using Property Estimation
1. Define molecular structure on the Properties
Molecular Structure form.
2. Enter any experimental data using Parameters or Data
forms.
- Experimental data such as normal boiling point (TB) is
very important for many estimation methods. It should
be entered whenever possible.
3. Activate Property Estimation and choose property
estimation options on the Properties Estimation Input
form.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 311 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Example of Entering Additional Data
• The following data was obtained for isobutyl alcohol.
- Normal boiling point (TB) = 107.6 C
- Critical temperature (TC) = 274.6 C
- Critical pressure (PC) = 43 bar
• Enter this data into the simulation to improve the
estimated values.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 312 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Example of Entering Additional Data
• Go to the Properties Parameters Pure Component Object
Manager and create a new Scalar parameter form.
• Enter the parameters, the components, and the values.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 313 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps For Using Property Estimation
1. Define molecular structure on the Properties
Molecular Structure form.
2. Enter any experimental data using Parameters or Data
forms.
- Experimental data such as normal boiling point (TB) is
very important for many estimation methods. It should
be entered whenever possible.
3. Activate Property Estimation and choose property
estimation options on the Properties Estimation Input
form.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 314 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Activating Property Estimation
• To turn on Property Estimation, go to the Properties
Estimation Input Setup sheet, and select one of the
following:
- Estimate all missing parameters
Estimates all missing required parameters and any
parameters you may request in the optional Pure
Component, T-Dependent, Binary, and UNIFAC-Group
sheets
- Estimate only the selected parameters
Estimates on the parameter types you select on this
sheet (and then specify on the appropriate additional
sheets)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 315 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Property Estimation Notes
• You can save your property data specifications,
structures, and estimates as backup files, and import
them into other simulations (Flowsheet, Data Regression,
Property Analysis, or Assay Data Analysis Run-Types.)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 316 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Property Estimation Workshop
Objective: Estimate the properties of a dimer,
ethycellosolve.
Ethylcellosolve is not in any of the Aspen Plus databanks.
Use a Run Type of Property Estimation, and estimate the properties for
the new component. (Detailed instructions are included on the following
slide.)
The formula for the component is shown below, along with the normal
boiling point obtained from literature.
Formula: CH3 - CH2 - O - CH2 - CH2 - O - CH2 - CH2 - OH
TB = 195 C
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 317 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Property Estimation Workshop (Continued)
• Open a new run, and change the Run Type on the Setup
Specifications Global sheet to Property Estimation.
• Enter a new non-databank component as Component ID DIMER, on
the Components Specifications Selection sheet.
• On the Properties Molecular Structure Object Manager, select DIMER
and click Edit.
• On the General sheet, enter the structure.
• Go to the Properties Parameters Pure Component Object Manager
and create a scalar parameter form.
• Enter the normal boiling point (TB) of DIMER as 195 C.
• Run the estimation, and examine the results.
• Note that the results of the estimation are automatically written to
parameters forms, for use in other simulations.
• Change the Run Type back to Flowsheet on the Setup Specifications
Global sheet.
• Go to the Properties Estimation Input Setup sheet, and choose Do
not estimate any parameters.
• Now, it is possible to add a flowsheet and use this component.
• Save this file as PCES.BKP.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 318 Introduction to Aspen Plus
319 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Electrolytes
Objective:
Introduce the electrolyte capabilities in Aspen Plus
Aspen Plus References:
•User Guide, Chapter 6, Specifying Components
•Physical Property Methods and Models Reference Manual ,
Chapter 5, Electrolyte Simulation
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 320 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Electrolytes Examples
• Solutions with acids, bases or salts
• Sour water solutions
• Aqueous amines or hot carbonate for gas sweetening
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 321 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Characteristics of an Electrolyte System
• Some molecular species dissociate partially or
completely into ions in a liquid solvent
• Liquid phase reactions are always at chemical
equilibrium
• Presence of ions in the liquid phase requires non-ideal
solution thermodynamics
• Possible salt precipitation
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 322 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Types of Components
• Solvents - Standard molecular species
- Water
- Methanol
- Acetic Acid
• Soluble Gases - Henry’s Law components
- Nitrogen
- Oxygen
- Carbon Dioxide
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 323 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Types of Components (Continued)
• Ions - Species with a charge
- H
3
O
+
- OH
-
- Na
+
- Cl
-
- Fe(CN)
6
3-
• Salts - Each precipitated salt is a new pure component.
- NaCl(s)
- CaCO
3
(s)
- CaSO
4
•2H
2
O (gypsum)
- Na
2
CO
3
•NaHCO
3
•2H
2
O (trona)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 324 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Apparent and True Components
• True component approach
- Result reported in terms of the ions, salts and
molecular species present after considering solution
chemistry
• Apparent component approach
- Results reported in terms of base components
present before considering solution chemistry
- Ions and precipitated salts cannot be apparent
components
- Specifications must be made in terms of apparent
components and not in terms of ions or solid salts
» Results are equivalent.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 325 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Apparent and True Components Example
• NaCl in water
- Solution chemistry
• NaCl --> Na
+
+ Cl
-
• Na
+
+ Cl
-
<--> NaCl(s)
- Apparent components
• H
2
O, NaCl
- True components:
• H
2
O, Na
+
, Cl
-
, NaCl(s)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 326 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Electrolyte Wizard
• Generates new components (ions and solid salts)
• Revises the Pure component databank search order so
that the first databank searched is now ASPENPCD.
• Generates reactions among components
• Sets the Property method to ELECNRTL
• Creates a Henry’s Component list
• Retrieves parameters for
- Reaction equilibrium constant values
- Salt solubility parameters
- ELECNRTL interaction parameters
- Henry’s constant correlation parameters
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 327 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Electrolyte Wizard (Continued)
• Generated chemistry can be modified. Simplifying the
Chemistry can make the simulation more robust and
decrease execution time.
» Note: It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the
Chemistry is representative of the actual chemical
system.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 328 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Simplifying the Chemistry
• Typical modifications include:
- Adding to the list of Henry’s components
- Eliminating irrelevant salt precipitation reactions
- Eliminating irrelevant species
- Adding species and/or reactions that are not in the
electrolytes expert system database
- Eliminating irrelevant equilibrium reactions
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 329 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Limitations of Electrolytes
• Restrictions using the True component approach:
- Liquid-liquid equilibrium cannot be calculated.
- The following models may not be used:
• Equilibrium reactors: RGibbs and REquil
• Kinetic reactors: RPlug, RCSTR, and RBatch
• Shortcut distillation: Distl, DSTWU and SCFrac
• Rigorous distillation: MultiFrac and PetroFrac
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 330 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Limitations of Electrolytes (Continued)
• Restrictions using the Apparent component approach:
- Chemistry may not contain any volatile species on
the right side of the reactions.
- Chemistry for liquid-liquid equilibrium may not
contain dissociation reactions.
- Input specification cannot be in terms of ions or solid
salts.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 331 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Electrolyte Demonstration
Objective: Create a flowsheet using electrolytes.
Create a simple flowsheet to mix and flash two feed streams containing
aqueous electrolytes. Use the Electrolyte Wizard to generate the
Chemistry.
FLASH2
FLASH
MIXED
VAPOR
LIQUID
MIXER
MIX
NAOH
HCL
Temp = 25 C
Pres = 1 bar
10 kmol/hr H2O
1 kmol/hr HCl
P-drop = 0
Adiabatic
Isobaric
Molar vapor fraction = 0.75
Filename: ELEC1.BKP
Temp = 25 C
Pres = 1 bar
10 kmol/hr H2O
1.1 kmol/hr NaOH
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 332 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Using Electrolytes
1. Specify the possible apparent components on the
Components Specifications Selection sheet.
2. Click on the Elec Wizard button to generate components
and reactions for electrolyte systems. There are 4 steps:
- Step 1: Define base components and select reaction
generation options.
- Step 2: Remove any undesired species or reactions from
the generated list.
- Step 3: Select simulation approach for electrolyte
calculations.
- Step 4: Review physical properties specifications and
modify the generated Henry components list and reactions.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 333 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Electrolyte Workshop
Objective: Create a flowsheet using electrolytes.
Create a simple flowsheet to model the treatment of a sulfuric acid
waste water stream using lime (Calcium Hydroxide). Use the Electrolyte
Wizard to generate the Chemistry. Use the true component approach.
B1
WASTEWAT
LIME
LIQUID
Temperature = 25C
Pressure = 1 bar
Flowrate = 10 kmol/hr
5 mole% lime (calcium hydroxide) solution
Temperature = 25C
Pressure = 1 bar
Flowrate = 10 kmol/hr
5 mole% sulfuric acid solution
Temperature = 25C
P-drop = 0
Note: Remove from the chemistry:
CaSO
4
(s)
CaSO
4
•1:2W:A(s)
When finished, save as
filename: ELEC.BKP
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 334 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Sour Water Stripper Workshop
On stage 10
P = 15 psia
Vapor frac = 1
2,000 lbs/hr
Above stage 3
P = 15 psia
10,000 lbs/hr
Mass fractions:
H2O 0.997
NH3 0.001
H2S 0.001
CO2 0.001
Saturated vapor
Theoretical trays: 9
(does not include condenser)
Partial condenser
Reflux Ratio (Molar): 25
No reboiler
B1
SOURWAT
STEAM
BOTTOMS
VAPOR
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 335 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Sour Water Stripper Workshop (Continued)
1. Open a new Electrolytes with English units flowsheet.
2. After drawing the flowsheet and entering the necessary
components, generate the electrolytes using the
Electrolytes Wizard. Select the apparent approach and
remove all solid salts used in the generated reactions.
Question: Why aren’t the ionic species’ compositions
displayed on the results forms? How can they be added?
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 336 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Sour Water Stripper Workshop (Continued)
3. Add a sensitivity analysis
a) Vary the steam flow rate and tabulate the ammonia
concentration in the bottoms stream. The target is
50 ppm.
b) Vary the column reflux ratio and observe the
condenser temperature. The target is 190 F.
4. Create design specifications
a) After hiding the sensitivity blocks, solve the column with
two design specifications. Use the targets and variables
from part 3.
Save as: SOURWAT.BKP
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 337 Introduction to Aspen Plus
338 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Solids Handling
Objective:
Provide an overview of the solid handling capabilities
Aspen Plus References:
• User Guide, Chapter 6, Specifying Components
• Physical Property Methods and Models Reference Manual,
Chapter 3, Property Model Descriptions
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 339 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Classes of Components
• Conventional Components
- Vapor and liquid components
- Solid salts in solution chemistry
• Conventional Inert Solids (CI Solids)
- Solids that are inert to phase equilibrium and salt
precipitation/solubility
• Nonconventional Solids (NC Solids)
- Heterogeneous substances inert to phase, salt, and
chemical equilibrium that cannot be represented with
a molecular structure
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 340 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Specifying Component Type
• When specifying components on the Components
Specifications Selection sheet, choose the appropriate
component type in the Type column.
- Conventional - Conventional Components
- Solid - Conventional Inert Solids
- Nonconventional - Nonconventional Solids
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 341 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Conventional Components
• Components participate in vapor and liquid equilibrium
along with salt and chemical equilibrium.
• Components have a molecular weight.
ðe.g. water, nitrogen, oxygen, sodium chloride, sodium
ions, chloride ions
ðLocated in the MIXED substream
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 342 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Conventional Inert Solids (CI Solids)
• Components are inert to phase equilibrium and salt
precipitation/solubility.
• Chemical equilibrium and reaction with conventional
components is possible.
• Components have a molecular weight.
ðe.g. carbon, sulfur
ðLocated in the CISOLID substream
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 343 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Nonconventional Solids (NC Solids)
• Components are inert to phase, salt or chemical
equilibrium.
• Chemical reaction with conventional and CI Solid
components is possible.
• Components are heterogeneous substances and do not
have a molecular weight.
ðe.g. coal, char, ash, wood pulp
ðLocated in the NC Solid substream
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 344 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Component Attributes
• Component attributes typically represent the
composition of a component in terms of some set of
identifiable constituents
• Component attributes can be
- Assigned by the user
- Initialized in streams
- Modified in unit operation models
• Component attributes are carried in the material stream.
• Properties of nonconventional components are
calculated by the physical property system using
component attributes.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 345 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Component Attribute Descriptions
Attribute Type Elements Description
PROXANAL 1. Moisture
2. Fixed Carbon
3. Volatile Matter
4. Ash
Proximate analysis, weight %dry
basis
ULTANAL 1. Ash
2. Carbon
3. Hydrogen
4. Nitrogen
5. Chlorine
6. Sulfur
7. Oxygen
Ultimate analysis, weight % dry
basis
SULFANAL 1. Pyritic
2. Sulfate
3. Organic
Forms of sulfur analysis, weight %
of original coal, dry basis
GENANAL 1. Constituent 1
2. Constituent 2
:
20. Constituent 20
General constituent analysis, weight
or volume %
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 346 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solid Properties
• For conventional components and conventional solids
- Enthalpy, entropy, free energy and molar volume are
computed.
- Property models in the Property Method specified on
the Properties Specification Global sheet are used.
• For nonconventional solids
- Enthalpy and mass density are computed.
- Property models are specified on the Properties
Advanced NC-Props form.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 347 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Properties - Conventional Solids
For Enthalpy, Free Energy, Entropy and Heat Capacity
• Barin Equations
- Single parameter set for all properties
- Multiple parameter sets may be available for
selected temperature ranges
- List INORGANIC databank before SOLIDS
• Conventional Equations
- Combines heat of formation and free energies of
formation with heat capacity models
- Aspen Plus and DIPPR model parameters
- List SOLIDS databank before INORGANIC
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 348 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Properties - Conventional Solids
• Solid Heat Capacity
- Heat capacity polynomial model
- Used to calculate enthalpy, entropy and free energy
- Parameter name: CPSP01
• Solid Molar Volume
- Volume polynomial model
- Used to calculate density
- Parameter name: VSPOLY
C C C T C T
C
T
C
T
C
T
p
oS
· + + + + +
1 2 3
2 4 5
2
6
3
V C C T C T C T C T
S
· + + + +
1 2 3
2
4
3
5
4
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 349 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Properties - Nonconventional Solids
• Enthalpy
- General heat capacity polynomial model: ENTHGEN
- Uses a mass fraction weighted average
- Based on the GENANAL attribute
- Parameter name: HCGEN
• Density
- General density polynomial model: DNSTYGEN
- Uses a mass fraction weighted average
- Based on the GENANAL attribute
- Parameter name: DENGEN
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 350 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Properties - Special Models for Coal
• Enthalpy
- Coal enthalpy model: HCOALGEN
- Based on the ULTANAL, PROXANAL and
SULFANAL attributes
• Density
- Coal density model: DCOALIGT
- Based on the ULTANAL and SULFANAL attributes
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 351 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Built-in Material Stream Classes
Stream Class Description
CONVEN* Conventional components only
MIXNC Conventional and nonconventional solids
MIXCISLD Conventional components and inert solids
MIXNCPSD Conventional components and nonconventional
solids with particle size distribution
MIXCIPSD Conventional components and inert solids with
particle size distribution
MIXCINC Conventional components and inert solids and
nonconventional solids
MIXCINCPSD Conventional components and nonconventional
solids with particle size distribution
* system default
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 352 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Unit Operation Models
• General Principles
- Material streams of any class are accepted.
- The same stream class should be used for inlet and
outlet streams (exceptions: Mixer and ClChng).
- Attributes (components or substream) not recognized
are passed unaltered through the block.
- Some models allow specifications for each substream
present (examples: Sep, RStoic).
- In vapor-liquid separation, solids leave with the liquid.
- Unless otherwise specified, outlet solid substreams
are in thermal equilibrium with the MIXED substream.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 353 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Workshop 1
Objective: Model a conventional solids dryer.
Dry SiO
2
from a water content of 0.5% to 0.1% using air.
Notes: Change the Stream class type to: MIXCISLD.
Put the SiO
2
in the CISOLID substream.
The pressure and temperature has to be the same in all the
sub-streams of a stream.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 354 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Workshop 1 (Continued)
When finished, save as
filename: SOLIDWK1.BKP
Temp = 70 F
Pres = 14.7 psia
995 lb/hr SiO
2
5 lb/hr H
2
O
FLASH2
DRYER
AIR
WET
DRY
AIR-OUT
Pressure Drop = 0
Adiabatic
Temp = 190 F
Pres = 14.7 psia
Flow = 1 lbmol/hr
0.79 mole% N
2
0.21 mole% O
2
Design specification:
Vary the air flow rate
from 1 to 10 lbmol/hr to
achieve 99.9 wt.% SiO
2
[SiO
2
/(SiO
2
+Mixed)]
Use the SOLIDS Property Method
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 355 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Workshop 2
Objective: Use the solids unit operations to model the
particulate removal from a feed of gasifier off gases.
The processing of gases containing small quantities of particulate
materials is rendered difficult by the tendency of the particulates to
interfere with most operations (e.g., surface erosion, fouling, plugging of
orifices and packing). It is therefore necessary to remove most of the
particulate materials from the gaseous stream. Various options are
available for this purpose (Cyclone, Bag-filter, Venturi-scrubber, and an
Electrostatic precipitator) and their particulate separation efficiency can
be changed by varying their design and operating conditions. The final
choice of equipment is a balance between the technical performance
and the cost associated with using a particular unit.
In this workshop, various options for removing particulates from the
syngas obtained by coal gasification are compared.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 356 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Workshop 2 (Continued)
When finished, save as
filename: SOLIDWK2.BKP
DUPL
CYC
FAB-FILT
ESP
V-SCRUB
FEED
F-CYC
F-SCRUB
F-ESP
F-BF
S-BF
G-CYC
S-CYC
G-SCRUB
S-SCRUB
LIQ
G-ESP
S-ESP
G-BF
Temp = 650 C
Pres = 1 bar
Gas Flowrate = 1000 kmol/hr
Ash Flowrate = 200 kg/hr
Composition (mole-frac)
CO 0.19
CO2 0.20
H2 0.05
H2S 0.02
O2 0.03
CH4 0.01
H2O 0.05
N2 0.35
SO2 0.10
Particle size distribution (PSD)
Size limit wt. %
[mu]
0- 44 30
44- 63 10
63-90 20
90-130 15
130-200 10
200-280 15
Temp = 40 C
Pres = 1 bar
Water Flowrate = 700 kg/hr
Design Mode
Max. Pres. Drop = 0.048 bar
Design Mode
High Efficiency
Separation Efficiency = 0.9
Design Mode
Separation Efficiency = 0.9
Dielectric constant = 1.5
Design Mode
Separation Efficiency = 0.9
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 357 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Solids Workshop 2 (Continued)
• Coal ash is mainly clay and heavy metal oxides and
can be considered a non-conventional component.
• HCOALGEN and DCOALIGT can be used to calculate
the enthalpy and material density of ash using the
ultimate, proximate, and sulfur analyses (ULTANAL,
PROXANAL, SULFANAL). These are specified on the
Properties Advanced NC-Props form.
• Component attributes (ULTANAL, PROXANAL,
SULFANAL) are specified on the Stream Input form.
For ash, zero all non-ash attributes.
• The PSD limits can be changed on the Setup
Substreams PSD form.
• Use the IDEAL Property Method.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 358 Introduction to Aspen Plus
359 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Optimization
Objective:
Introduce the optimization capability in Aspen Plus
Aspen Plus References:
•User Guide, Chapter 22, Optimization
Related Topics:
•User Guide, Chapter 17, Convergence
•User Guide, Chapter 18, Accessing Flowsheet Variables
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 360 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Optimization
• Used to maximize/minimize an objective function
• Objective function is expressed in terms of flowsheet
variables and In-Line Fortran.
• Optimization can have zero or more constraints.
• Constraints can be equalities or inequalities.
• Optimization is located under /Data/Model Analysis
Tools/Optimization
• Constraint specification is under /Data/Model Analysis
Tools/Constraint
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 361 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Optimization Example
For an existing reactor, find the reactor temperature and
inlet amount of reactant A that maximizes the profit from this
reactor. The reactor can only handle a maximum cooling
load of Q.
Desired Product C $ 1.30 / lb
By-product D $ 0.11 / lb
Waste Product E $
-
0.20 /lb
FEED
PRODUCT
REACTOR
A, B
A + B
--
> C + D + E
A, B, C, D, E
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 362 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Optimization Example (Continued)
• What are the measured (sampled) variables?
- Outlet flowrates of components C, D, E
• What is the objective function to be maximized?
- 1.30*(lb/hr C) + 0.11*(lb/hr D) - 0.20*(lb/hr E)
• What is the constraint?
- The calculated duty of the reactor can not exceed Q.
• What are the manipulated (varied) variables?
- Reactor temperature
- Inlet amount of reactant A
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 363 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Using Optimization
1. Identify measured (sampled) variables.
- These are the flowsheet variables used to calculate
the objective function (Optimization Define sheet).
2. Specify objective function (expression).
- This is the Fortran expression that will be maximized
or minimized (Optimization Objective & Constraints
sheet).
3. Specify maximization or minimization of objective
function (Optimization Objective & Constraints sheet).
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 364 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps for Using Optimization (Continued)
4. Specify constraints (optional).
- These are the constraints used during the optimization
(Optimization Objective & Constraints sheet).
5. Specify manipulated (varied) variables.
- These are the variables that the optimization block will
change to maximize/minimize the objective function
(Optimization Vary sheet).
6. Specify bounds for manipulated (varied) variables.
- These are the lower and upper bounds within which to
vary the manipulated variable (Optimization Vary
sheet).
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 365 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes
1. The convergence of the optimization can be sensitive to
the initial values of the manipulated variables.
2. It is best if the objective, the constraints, and the
manipulated variables are in the range of 1 to 100. This
can be accomplished by simply multiplying or dividing
the function.
3. The optimization algorithm only finds local maxima and
minima in the objective function. It is theoretically
possible to obtain a different maximum/minimum in the
objective function, in some cases, by starting at a
different point in the solution space.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 366 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Notes (Continued)
4. Equality constraints within an optimization are similar to
design specifications.
5. If an optimization does not converge, run sensitivity
studies with the same manipulated variables as the
optimization, to ensure that the objective function is not
discontinuous with respect to any of the manipulated
variables.
6. Optimization blocks also have convergence blocks
associated with them. Any general techniques used with
convergence blocks can be used if the optimization does
not converge.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 367 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Optimization Workshop
Objective: Optimize steam usage for a process.
The flowsheet shown below is part of a Dichloro-Methane solvent
recovery system. The two flashes, TOWER1 and TOWER2, are run
adiabatically at 19.7 and 18.7 psia respectively. The stream FEED
contains 1400 lb/hr of Dichloro-Methane and 98600 lb/hr of water at
100
o
F and 24 psia. Set up the simulation as shown below, and minimize
the total usage of steam in streams STEAM1 and STEAM2, both of
which contain saturated steam at 200 psia. The maximum allowable
concentration of Dichloro-Methane in the stream EFFLUENT from
TOWER2 is 150 ppm (mass) to within a tolerance of a tenth of a ppm.
Use the NRTL Property Method. Use bounds of 1000 lb/hr to 20,000
lb/hr for the flowrate of the two steam streams. Make sure stream flows
are reported in mass flow and mass fraction units before running. Refer
to the Notes slides for some hints on the previous page if there are
problems converging the optimization.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 368 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Optimization Workshop (Continued)
When finished, save as
filename: OPT.BKP
STEAM1
FEED
TOP1
BOT1
TOP2
EFFLUENT
STEAM2
TOWER1
TOWER2
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 369 Introduction to Aspen Plus
370 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
RadFrac Convergence
Objective:
Introduce the convergence algorithms and initialization
strategies available in RadFrac
Aspen Plus References:
• Unit Operation Models Reference Manual, Chapter 4, Columns
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 371 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Convergence Methods
RadFrac provides a variety of convergence methods for
solving separation problems. Each convergence method
represents a convergence algorithm and an initialization
method. The following convergence methods are available:
• Standard (default)
• Petroleum / Wide-Boiling
• Strongly non-ideal liquid
• Azeotropic
• Cryogenic
• Custom
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 372 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Method Algorithm Initialization
Standard Standard Standard
Petroleum / Wide-boiling Sum-Rates Standard
Strongly non-ideal liquid Nonideal Standard
Azeotropic Newton Azeotropic
Cryogenic Standard Cryogenic
Custom select any select any
Convergence Methods (Continued)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 373 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Convergence Algorithms
RadFrac provides four convergence algorithms:
• Standard (with Absorber=Yes or No)
• Sum-Rates
• Nonideal
• Newton
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 374 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Standard Algorithm
The Standard (default, Absorber=No) algorithm:
• Uses the original inside-out formulation
• Is effective and fast for most problems
• Solves design specifications in a middle loop
• May have difficulties with extremely wide-boiling or
highly non-ideal mixtures
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 375 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Standard Algorithm (Continued)
The Standard algorithm with Absorber=Yes:
• Uses a modified formulation similar to the classical
sum-rates algorithm
• Applies to absorbers and strippers only
• Has fast convergence
• Solves design specifications in a middle loop
• May have difficulties with highly non-ideal mixtures
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 376 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Sum-Rates Algorithm
The Sum-Rates algorithm:
• Uses a modified formulation similar to the classical
sum-rates algorithm
• Solves design specifications simultaneously with the
column-describing equations
• Is effective and fast for wide boiling mixtures and
problems with many design specifications
• May have difficulties with highly non-ideal mixtures
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 377 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Nonideal Algorithm
The Nonideal algorithm:
• Includes a composition dependency in the local
physical property models
• Uses the continuation convergence method
• Solves design specifications in a middle loop
• Is effective for non-ideal problems
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 378 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Newton Algorithm
The Newton algorithm:
• Is a classic implementation of the Newton method
• Solves all column-describing equations simultaneously
• Uses the dogleg strategy of Powell to stabilize
convergence
• Can solve design specifications simultaneously or in an
outer loop
• Handles non-ideality well, with excellent convergence in
the vicinity of the solution
• Is recommended for azeotropic distillation columns
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 379 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid Calculations
You can use the Standard, Newton and Nonideal
algorithms for 3-phase Vapor-Liquid-Liquid systems.
On the RadFrac Setup Configuration sheet, select
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid in the Valid Phases field.
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid calculations:
• Handle column calculations involving two liquid phases
rigorously
• Handle decanters
• Solve design specifications using:
- Either the simultaneous (default) loop or the middle
loop approach for the Newton algorithm
- The middle loop approach for all other algorithms
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 380 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Convergence Method Selection
For Vapor-Liquid systems, start with the Standard
convergence method. If the Standard method fails:
• Use the Petroleum / Wide Boiling method if the mixture
is very wide-boiling.
• Use the Custom method and change Absorber to Yes
on the RadFrac Convergence Algorithm sheet, if the
column is an absorber or a stripper.
• Use the Strongly non-ideal liquid method if the mixture
is highly non-ideal.
• Use the Azeotropic method for azeotropic distillation
problems with multiple solutions possible. The
Azeotropic algorithm is also another alternative for
highly non-ideal systems.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 381 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Convergence Method Selection (Continued)
For Vapor-Liquid-Liquid systems:
• Start by selecting Vapor-Liquid-Liquid in the Valid
Phases field of the RadFrac Setup Configuration sheet
and use the Standard convergence method.
• If the Standard method fails, try the Custom method
with the Nonideal or the Newton algorithm.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 382 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Initialization Method
Standard is the default Initialization method for RadFrac.
This method:
• Performs flash calculations on composite feed to obtain
average vapor and liquid compositions
• Assumes a constant composition profile
• Estimates temperature profiles based on bubble and
dew point temperatures of composite feed
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 383 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Specialized Initialization Methods
Four specialized Initialization methods are available.
Use: For:
Crude Wide boiling systems with
multi-draw columns
Chemical Narrow boiling chemical systems
Azeotropic Azeotropic distillation columns
Cryogenic Cryogenic applications
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 384 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Estimates
RadFrac does not usually require estimates for
temperature, flow and composition profiles.
RadFrac may require:
• Temperature estimates as a first trial in case of
convergence problems
• Liquid and/or vapor flow estimates for the separation of
wide boiling mixtures.
• Composition estimates for highly non-ideal, extremely
wide-boiling (for example, hydrogen-rich), azeotropic
distillation or vapor-liquid-liquid systems.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 385 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Composition Estimates
The following example illustrates the need for composition
estimates in an extremely wide-boiling point system:
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 386 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Convergence Workshop
Objective: Apply the convergence hints explained in this
section.
HCl column in a VCM production plant
• Feed
- 130000 kg/hr at 50C, 18 bar
- 19.5%wt HCl, 33.5%wt VCM, 47%wt EDC
- (VCM : vinyl-chloride, EDC : 1,2-dichloroethane)
• Column
- 33 theoretical stages
- partial condenser (vapor distillate)
- kettle reboiler
- pressure : top 17.88 bar, bottom 18.24 bar
- feed on stage 17
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 387 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Convergence Workshop (Continued)
First Step:
Specify the column.
- Set the distillate flow rate to be equal to the mass flow rate of
HCl in the feed.
- Specify that the mass reflux ratio is 0.7.
- Use Peng-Robinson equation of state (PENG-ROB).
» Question: How should these specifications be implemented?
Note:
Look at the results.
- Temperature profile
- Composition profile
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 388 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Convergence Workshop (Continued)
Second step:
VCM in distillate and HCl in bottom are much too high!
- Allow only 5 ppm of HCl in the residue and 10 ppm VCM in the
distillate.
» Question: How should these specifications be implemented?
Note:
You may have some convergence difficulties.
- Apply the guidelines presented in this section
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 389 Introduction to Aspen Plus
RadFrac Convergence Workshop (Continued)
COL
FEED
DIST
BOT
feed on stage 17
130000 kg/h
50 C, 18 bar,
HCl 19.5%wt
VCM 33.5%wt
EDC 47.0%wt
mass reflux ratio:0.7
flow : HCl in feed
max 10 ppm VCM
max 5 ppm HCl
17.88 bar
18.24 bar
When finished, save as filename: VCMHCL1.BKP (step 1) and VCMHCL2.BKP (step 2)
Use the PENG-ROB Property method
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 390 Introduction to Aspen Plus
391 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Vinyl Chloride Monomer (VCM) Workshop
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 392 Introduction to Aspen Plus
VCM Workshop
Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) is produced through a high pressure,
non-catalytic process involving the pyrolysis of 1,2-dichloroethane
(EDC) according to the following reaction
CH
2
Cl-CH
2
Cl HCl + CHCl=CH
2
The cracking of EDC occurs at 500 C and 30 bar in a direct fired
furnace. 1000 kmol/hr of pure EDC feed enters the reactor at 20 C and
30 bar. EDC conversion in the reactor is maintained at 55%. The hot
gases from the reactor are subcooled by 10 degrees before
fractionation.
Two distillation columns are used for the purification of the VCM
product. In the first column, anhydrous HCl is removed overhead and
sent to the oxy chlorination unit. In the second column, VCM product is
removed overhead and the bottoms stream containing unreacted EDC
is recycled back to the furnace. Overheads from both columns are
removed as saturated liquids. The HCL column is run at 25 bar and the
VCM column is run at 8 bar. Use the RK-SOAVE Property Method.
Objective: Set up a flowsheet of a VCM process using the
tools learned in the course.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 393 Introduction to Aspen Plus
VCM Workshop (Continued)
1000 kmol/hr EDC
20C
30 bar
CRACK
FEED
RECYCIN
REACTOUT
PUMP
RECYCLE
QUENCH
COOLOUT
COL1
HCLOUT
VCMIN
COL2
VCMOUT
RStoic Model
Heater Model
Pump Model
RadFrac Model
RadFrac Model
30 bar outlet pressure
500 C
30 bar
EDC Conv. = 55%
10 deg C subcooling
0.5 bar pressure drop
10 stages
Reflux ratio = 0.969
Distillate to feed ratio = 0.550
Feed enters above stage 7
Column pressure = 8 bar
15 stages
Reflux ratio = 1.082
Distillate to feed ratio = 0.354
Feed enters above stage 8
Column pressure = 25 bar
When finished, save as
filename: VCM.BKP
Use RK-SOAVE property method
CH
2
Cl-CH
2
Cl HCl + CHCl=CH
2
EDC HCl VCM
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 394 Introduction to Aspen Plus
VCM Workshop (Continued)
Part A:
With the help of the process flow diagram on the previous page, set up a
flowsheet to simulate the VCM process. What are the values of the following
quantities?
1. Furnace heat duty ________
2. Quench cooling duty ________
3. Quench outlet temperature ________
4. Condenser and Reboiler duties for COL2 ________
________
5. Concentration of VCM in the product stream ________
Part B:
The conversion of EDC to VCM in the furnace varies between 50% and 55%.
Use the sensitivity analysis capability to generate plots of the furnace heat duty
and quench cooling duty as a function of EDC conversion.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 395 Introduction to Aspen Plus
396 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Potential
Reach Your
True
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
ActiveX Automation
Objective:
Introduce ActiveX Automation Capabilities in Aspen Plus
Aspen Plus References:
•User Guide, Chapter 38, Using the Aspen Plus ActiveX Automation
Server
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 397 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Windows Interoperability
• Three Levels
- Copy/Paste
- Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
- ActiveX Server
• Third level is programming against the software using a
macro language. The language demonstrated is Visual
Basic for Applications using Excel97 as the interface.
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 398 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Capabilities of Automation
• Cannot
- Add Streams
- Add Unit Operation Blocks
- Manipulate Flowsheet Graphics
• Can
- Change Input Specifications
- Read Output Results
- Perform Run Control
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 399 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Aspen Plus Simulation File
• Cannot use Automation to Add Blocks/Streams so
starting point must be an existing Aspen Plus
Simulation file
• Can use any of the following file types
- *.apw Aspen Plus Document
- *.bkp Aspen Plus Backup File
- *.inp Aspen Plus Input File
- *.apt Aspen Plus Template
• For this demonstration, load pfdtut.bkp, Reinitialize,
then SaveAs... ActiveXDemo1.bkp
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 400 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Automation Demonstration 1
• Objective: Create an Excel Workbook that performs
the following
- Open Aspen Plus Simulation
- Close Aspen Plus Simulation
- Run Simulation
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 401 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Steps to Create Workbook
• Open Excel
- Setup Excel for VBA Programming
- Select Reference to Aspen Plus
• Place/Modify Controls
• Add Additional Text to Workbook
• Program General Declarations
• Write Code into Subroutines and Control Events
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 402 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Setup Excel for VBA Programming
• Open a New Excel Workbook
• Add the “Control Toolbox” Toolbar
- Select View/Toolbars/Control Toolbox
• Open the VBA programming environment
- Select Tools/Macro/Visual Basic Environment (VBE)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 403 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Select Reference to Aspen Plus
• Make the VBE the active window
• Select Tools/References
• Look for “ASPEN PLUS GUI 10.0-1 Type Library”
• If not found, use Browse button to find
- ...\APUI\xeq\happ.tlb
• Select reference by clicking the check box and pressing
“OK” to complete the task and close the dialogue box
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 404 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Place/Modify Controls (1 of 6)
• Make the Excel Workbook the active window
• Change the Workbook to Design Mode by pressing the
“Design Mode” button on the Control Toolbox
toolbar
• Add 3 Command Buttons to the Workbook
- Select the Command Button from the Control
Toolbox toolbar
- Move the cursor on to the Workbook. It will change
to crosshairs. Click the upper left corner of cell G2
- Repeat above for cell G4, G6
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 405 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Place/Modify Controls (2 of 6)
• Add 1 Check Box to the Workbook
- Select the Check Box from the Control Toolbox
toolbar
- Place the control on the upper left corner of cell D2
• The Workbook should look something like this
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 406 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Place/Modify Controls (3 of 6)
• Select any of the controls by clicking on it to make the
small boxes appear around the edge
• With the cursor still over the control, click your Right
Mouse button (for right-handed people). This will open
a pop-up menu.
• Select Properties from this menu. This will display the
Properties window
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 407 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Place/Modify Controls (4 of 6)
• Change the properties of the controls using the info in
the table below
• Change the control displayed in the property window by
selecting the control on the workbook or changing the
selection on the top of the property window
Control Property Value
CommandButton1 Name cmd_OpenSimulation
Caption Open Simulation
CommandButton2 Name cmd_CloseSimulation
Caption Close Simulation
CommandButton3 Name cmd_RunSimulation
Caption Run Simulation
CheckBox1 Name chk_IsVisible
Caption Make Visible
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 408 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Place/Modify Controls (5 of 6)
• When finished, the Properties window for the Check
Box should look something like this
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 409 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Place/Modify Controls (6 of 6)
• The Workbook should look something like this
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 410 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Add Additional Text to Workbook (1 of 2)
• Use the table to add text to the workbook
Cell Size/Effect Text
A1 16pt/Bold Aspen Plus/ActiveX
Demonstration
A4 12pt/Bold Simulation File
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 411 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Add Additional Text to Workbook (2 of 2)
• The Workbook should look something like this
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 412 Introduction to Aspen Plus
General Declarations
• Make the VBE the active window
• Select Insert/Module to create a new Basic module
• Insert the following code into the module
• All text in lines that start with a ‘ are comments and do
not need to be typed
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 413 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Code Subroutine
• Make the VBE the active window
• Add the following code into the Basic Module below the
General Declarations written before
• Note: For this and all following code, the code IS
CASE-SENSITIVE
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 414 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Code Control Events (1 of 4)
• To code the specific control, make the workbook the
active window, make sure the Design Mode button is
pressed, and then Double-Click on the control
• To code the event below, make the workbook the active
window then double click on the checkbox. The VBE
will open and the cursor will be inside the following
paragraph. The If-Then lines are what needs to be
typed
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 415 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Code Control Events (2 of 4)
• Code the following control event
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 416 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Code Control Events (3 of 4)
• Code the following control event
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 417 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Code Control Events (4 of 4)
• Code the following control event
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 418 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Code Workbook_BeforeCloseEvent (1 of 2)
• If you exit the workbook without closing the loaded
simulation, the simulation will still exist. It will still be in
memory but not accessible. To prevent this, do the
following steps
- Make the VBE the default
- Double click on “This Workbook” from the explorer
type view on the left side of the VBE. This will
create a window in the code area titled “filename -
ThisWorkbook (code)
- Change the drop down controls to read “Workbook”
(left selection) and “Before_Close”
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 419 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Code Workbook_BeforeCloseEvent (2 of 2)
• Add the following code
• Save the file as ActiveXDemo1.xls
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 420 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Running Demonstration
• Make the Workbook the active window
• Press the Design Mode button so it is inactive
• Press the “Open Simulation” button
- Find ActiveXDemo1.bkp on your disk
• Press the “Run Simulation” button
- The program will execute
• The Aspen Plus GUI can be made Visible/Not Visible
using the check box
• Save the workbook, it is the starting point for the
Workshop
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 421 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Demonstration of Input/Output
• Objective
- Modify workbook to accept input and display output
results after running simulation
• The modifications will do the following:
- Add additional text to workbook
- Add subroutines in the VBE
- Modify the code in the Run Command Button
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 422 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Add Additional Text to Workbook (1 of 2)
• Use the table to add text to the workbook
Cell Size/Effect Text
A7 12pt/bold Input Values
D7 12pt/bold Output Values
A8 10pt/normal Stream 2 Total Flow Rate
D8 10pt/normal Block B2 Heat Duty
B9 10pt/normal lbmol/hr
E9 10pt/normal MMBtu/hr
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 423 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Add Additional Text to Workbook (2 of 2)
• The Workbook should look something like this
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 424 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Aspen Plus Variable Explorer (1 of 2)
• Aspen Plus provides a way to find the syntax to specific
variables in a simulation
• Make a copy of the Aspen Plus simulation file and use
the Variable Explorer on the copy
• Found Under Tools/Variable Explorer
• All Numeric Input/Output Variables are found under
Root/Data/[Streams or Blocks]
• When you find the variable of interest, the syntax is
displayed in the “Path to Node” window. This text can
be copied into your program environment
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 425 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Aspen Plus Variable Explorer (2 of 2)
• The Variable Explorer will look something like this when
the proper path to the Block B2 Heat Duty is selected
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 426 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Code Subroutines
• Add subroutines to Module 1 in the VBE
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 427 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Modify Run Button Code
• Change the Run Button code to the following
• Save the file as ActiveXDemo2.xls
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 428 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Running Demonstration
• Make the Workbook the active window
• Press the Design Mode button so it is inactive
• Press the Open Simulation Button and load
ActiveXDemo1.xls
• Change to cell A9 and enter a value between 100-101
• Press the Run Simulation Button
- You may have to clear dialogue boxes caused by
the Reinit command
• The simulation will run and the results will be displayed
in cell D9
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 429 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Automation Workshop
• Objective
- Add code and text to Workbook to perform the
following
• Input Temperature of Block B2 (use cell A11, keep
between 350-450 F)
• Output Total Flow Rate of Stream 9 (use cell D11)
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 430 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Workshop Answer (1 of 2)
• The Workbook should look something like this
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 431 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Workshop Answer (2 of 2)
• Modified Subroutines
• Save the file as ActiveXWorkshop.xls
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.
®
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12, 2001 Slide 432 Introduction to Aspen Plus
Additional Topics
• Error Checking is not included in example
• Further capabilities
- Changing units
- More Complex Output (RadFrac profiles, stream
reports)
- More Complex input (changing multiple
specifications, changing composition of streams)
• Covered in “ActiveX Automation of Aspen Plus” course

Contact Information • Phone: 888-996-7001 or 617-949-1021 • Email: support@aspentech.com • Internet: http://www.aspentech.com - Technical Support Hotline - Training
(Contact: Pat Sylvia)

- Customized Support Services
(Contact: Andrea Orchanian)

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 2
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Course Agenda - Day 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
®

Introduction - General Simulation Concepts The User Interface - Graphical Flowsheet Definition Basic Input - Getting Around the Graphical User Interface Unit Operation Models - Overview of Available Unit Operations RadFrac - Multistage Separation Model Reactor Models - Overview of Available Reactor Types Cyclohexane Production Workshop
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 3
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Course Agenda - Day 2
8. 9. Physical Properties - Overview of Thermodynamic Models, Basic Property Analysis and Reporting Accessing Variables - Making References to Flowsheet Variables

10. Sensitivity Analysis - Studying Relationships Between Process Variables 11. Design Specifications - Meeting Process Objectives 12. Fortran Blocks - Use of In-Line Fortran 13. Windows Interoperability - Transferring Data to and from Other Windows Programs
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 4
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Course Agenda - Day 3
14. Heat Exchangers - Heaters and Heat Exchangers 15. Pressure Changers - Pumps, Compressors, Pipes and Valves 16. Flowsheet Convergence - Convergence Blocks, Tear Streams and Flowsheet Sequences 17. Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop - Simulate a Methanol Plant

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 5
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Additional Topics
18. Maintaining Aspen Plus Simulations - Managing Aspen Plus Files for Storage and Retrieval 19. Customizing the Look of Your Flowsheet - Creating Process Flow Diagrams 20. Estimation of Physical Properties - Overview of Property Estimation 21. Electrolytes - Introduction to the Use of Electrolytes 22. Solids Handling - Overview of the Solids Capabilities 23. Optimization - Optimizing a Flowsheet
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 6
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Additional Topics (Continued)
24. RadFrac Convergence - Techniques for Converging Difficult Columns 25. VCM Workshop 26. ActiveX Automation

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 7
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Appendices
A. B. C. D. Enthalpy Reference and Heat of Reaction Workshop Instructions Workshop Results Final Workshop Hints

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 8
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

9 . All rights reserved.Reach Your Potential True Introduction Objective: Introduce general flowsheet simulation concepts and Aspen Plus features Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech.

All rights reserved. compositions.Introduction • What is flowsheet simulation? ðUse of a computer program to quantitatively model the characteristic equations of a chemical process • Uses underlying physical relationships .Stream flowrates.Equipment sizes Septiembre 12.Mass and energy balance . and properties .Rate correlations (reaction and mass/heat transfer) • Predicts . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 10 ©1998 AspenTech.Operating conditions .Equilibrium relationships . .

Advantages of Simulation • Reduces plant design time .Allows designer to quickly test various plant configurations • Helps improve current process .Assists in locating the constraining parts of a process (debottlenecking) Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 11 ©1998 AspenTech.Determines optimal process conditions within given constraints . All rights reserved.Answers “what if” questions .

Material balances . 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 12 ©1998 AspenTech. we need: . ® .Energy balances Septiembre 12.General Simulation Problem What is the composition of stream PRODUCT? RECYCLE REACTOR COOL FEED REAC-OUT COOL-OUT SEP PRODUCT • To solve this problem. All rights reserved.

• Equation Oriented . Septiembre 12. .Aspen Dynamics (formerly DynaPLUS) uses the Aspen Plus sequential modular approach to initialize the steady state simulation and the Aspen Custom Modeler (formerly SPEEDUP) equation oriented approach to solve the dynamic simulation.Each unit operation block is solved in a certain sequence.Approaches to Flowsheet Simulation • Sequential Modular . . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 13 ©1998 AspenTech. • Combination .Aspen Plus is a sequential modular simulation program.Aspen Custom Modeler (formerly SPEEDUP) is an equation oriented simulation program. .All equations are solved simultaneously. All rights reserved.

.Good Flowsheeting Practice • Build large flowsheets a few blocks at a time. • Check that results are consistent and realistic. Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. • Ensure flowsheet inputs are reasonable. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 14 ©1998 AspenTech.This facilitates troubleshooting if errors occur.

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 15 ©1998 AspenTech.Important Features of Aspen Plus • Rigorous Electrolyte Simulation • Solids Handling • Petroleum Handling • Data Regression • Data Fit • Optimization • User Routines Septiembre 12. .

.Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 16 ©1998 AspenTech.

Chapter 1. Creating a Simulation Model • User Guide. 17 .Reach Your Potential True The User Interface Objective: Become comfortable and familiar with the Aspen Plus graphical user interface Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. All rights reserved. Chapter 4. Chapter 2. The User Interface • User Guide.Introduction tothe Flowsheet Defining Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech.

Chapter 1. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 18 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. The User Interface Septiembre 12.The User Interface Run ID Title Bar Menu Bar Next Button Tool Bar Select Mode button Model Library Model Menu Tabs Status Area Process Flowsheet Window Reference: Aspen Plus User Guide. .

BKP Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 19 ©1998 AspenTech. .Cumene Flowsheet Definition RECYCLE REACTOR COOL FEED REAC-OUT COOL-OUT SEP Flash2 Model PRODUCT RStoic Model Heater Model Filename: CUMENE.

Open Data Browser object sheet Reference: Aspen Plus User Guide.Using the Mouse • Left button click • Right button click • Double left click Select object/field Bring up menu for selected object/field. The User Interface Septiembre 12. . or inlet/outlet . Chapter 1. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 20 ©1998 AspenTech.

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 21 ©1998 AspenTech. 2. Septiembre 12. You can also click on the model icon and drag it onto the flowsheet. Click on the model and then click on the flowsheet to place the block. 4. Click on a model category tab in the Model Library. 3. Click the right mouse button to stop placing blocks. All rights reserved. Click the drop-down arrow to select an icon for the model.Graphic Flowsheet Operations To place a block on the flowsheet: 1. Select a unit operation model.

To place one end of the stream as either a process flowsheet feed or product. Click a highlighted port to make the connection. 6. Click the right mouse button to stop creating streams. 5. 2.Graphic Flowsheet Operations (Continued) • To place a stream on the flowsheet: 1. 3. If you want to select a different stream type (Material. . All rights reserved. Heat or Work). 4. Septiembre 12. Click on the STREAMS icon in the Model Library. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 22 ©1998 AspenTech. click the down arrow next to the icon and choose a different type. Repeat step 3 to connect the other end of the stream. click a blank part of the Process Flowsheet window.

Chapter 4. All rights reserved. Click the right mouse button while the pointer is over the selected object icon to bring up the menu for that object. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 23 ©1998 AspenTech. Delete.Graphic Flowsheet Operations (Continued) • To display an Input form for a Block or a Stream in the Data Browser: 1. Defining the Flowsheet Septiembre 12. . 2. • To Rename. Double click the left mouse button on the object of interest. Select object (Block or Stream) by clicking on it with the left mouse button. 3. Change the icon. Reference: Aspen Plus User Guide. provide input or view results for a block or stream: 1. Choose appropriate menu item.

Automatic Naming of Streams and Blocks • • • Stream and block names can be automatically assigned by Aspen Plus or entered by the user when the object is created. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 24 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved. .Click the Flowsheet tab. To modify the naming options: .Select Options from the Tools menu. .Check or uncheck the naming options desired. Stream and block names can be displayed or hidden.

Rename the blocks and streams. Introduction to Aspen Plus . 2001 ® LIQ2 Slide 25 ©1998 AspenTech.Benzene Flowsheet Definition Workshop Objective: Create a graphical flowsheet - Start with the General with English Units Template. All rights reserved. filename: BENZENE.BKP).BKP Septiembre 12. save in backup format (Run-ID. Choose the appropriate icons for the blocks. VAP1 COOL FEED COOL FL1 VAP2 Flash2 Model Heater Model FL2 LIQ1 Flash2 Model When finished.

All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 26 ©1998 AspenTech.Septiembre 12.

Using Aspen Plus Help • User Guide. 27 . Chapter 6. Specifying Streams • User Guide. Chapter 9. Global Information for Calculations • User Guide.Reach Your Potential True Basic Input Objective: Introduce the basic input required to run an Aspen Plus simulation Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. Chapter 7. Specifying Components • User Guide. Chapter 3. All rights reserved. Chapter 11. Chapter 10. Running Your Simulation Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. Chapter 5. Physical Property Methods • User Guide. Unit Operation Models • User Guide.

forms. All rights reserved. resized.The User Interface Menus .Can be moved .Can be moved. and sheets Septiembre 12. minimized. .Can be hidden or revealed using the Toolbars dialog box from the View menu Data Browser . maximized or closed . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 28 ©1998 AspenTech.Allows direct access to certain popular functions .Used to navigate the folders.Used to specify program options and commands Toolbar .

The User Interface (Continued) Folders . .Make up forms .Are located in folders Sheets .Are selected using tabs at the top of each sheet Septiembre 12.Refers to the root items in the Data Browser .Used to enter data and view results for the simulation .Can be comprised of a number of sheets . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 29 ©1998 AspenTech.Contain forms Forms .

Checks if the current form is complete and skips to the next form which requires input Septiembre 12.Can be created. edited. deleted. hidden. renamed. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 30 ©1998 AspenTech.Allows manipulation of discrete objects of information . All rights reserved.The User Interface (Continued) Object Manager . and revealed Next Button . .

.The Data Browser Go back Parent button Units Go forward Previous sheet Next sheet Comments Status Next Menu tree Status area Description area Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 31 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Used to search for a help on a topic that includes any word or words • “What’s This?” Help . The User Guides and Reference Manuals are all included in the help. . • All of the information in the User Guides is found under the “Using Aspen Plus” book. All rights reserved. .Used to search for help on a topic using the index entries Find .Select “What’s This?” from the Help menu and then click on any area to get help for that item.Used to browse through the documentation.Contents .Help • Help Topics . Septiembre 12.Index . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 32 ©1998 AspenTech.

Septiembre 12. • Click the drop-down arrow in a field to bring up a list of possible input values for that field. .Functionality of Forms • When you select a field on a form (click left mouse button in the field). 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 33 ©1998 AspenTech. the prompt area at the bottom of the window gives you information about that field. All rights reserved.Typing a letter will bring up the next selection on the list that begins with that letter. . • The Tab key will take you to the next field on a form.

Properties . .Setup . All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.Streams .Basic Input • The minimum required inputs (in addition to the graphical flowsheet) to run a simulation are: . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 34 ©1998 AspenTech.Components .Blocks • These inputs are all found in folders within the Data Browser. • These input folders can be located quickly using the Data menu or the Data Browser buttons on the toolbar.

. Results for the form exist. Results for the form exist. Results for the form exist. but there were calculation warnings. All rights reserved.Status Indicators Symbol Status Input for the form is incomplete Input for the form is complete No input for the form has been entered. Septiembre 12. but there were calculation errors. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 35 ©1998 AspenTech. Results for the form exist. but input has changed since the results were generated. It is optional.

BKP Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 36 ©1998 AspenTech.Cumene Production Conditions RECYCLE REACTOR COOL FEED T = 220 F P = 36 psia Benzene: 40 lbmol/hr Propylene: 40 lbmol/hr REAC-OUT COOL-OUT SEP P = 1 atm Q = 0 Btu/hr Q = 0 Btu/hr Pdrop = 0 psi T = 130 F Pdrop = 0. All rights reserved. .1 psi PRODUCT C6H6 + C3H6 = C9H12 Benzene Propylene Cumene (Isopropylbenzene) 90% Conversion of Propylene Use the RK-SOAVE Property Method Filename: CUMENE.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 37 ©1998 AspenTech.g. . vapor-liquid or vapor-liquid-liquid) • Ambient pressure Stream report options are located on the Setup Report Options Stream sheet.Setup Most of the commonly used Setup information is entered on the Setup Specifications Global sheet: • Flowsheet title to be used on reports • Run type • Input and output units • Valid phases (e. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.

Setup Specifications Form Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 38 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. .

Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.Stream Report Options Stream report options are located on the Setup Report Options Stream sheet. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 39 ©1998 AspenTech.

or with your company's in-house programs. . Flowsheet runs can contain property estimation.Setup Run Types Run Type Flowsheet Standard Aspen Plus flowsheet run including sensitivity studies and optimization. and other mixture data. Assay Data Analysis Data Regression A standalone Assay Data Analysis and pseudocomponent generation run Use Assay Data Analysis to analyze assay data when you do not want to perform a flowsheet simulation in the same run. Data Regression can contain property estimation and property analysis calculations. VLE. Property Analysis can contain property estimation and assay data analysis calculations. Standalone Property Constant Estimation run Use Property Estimation to estimate property parameters when you do not want to perform a flowsheet simulation in the same run. A standalone Data Regression run Use Data Regression to fit physical property model parameters required by ASPEN PLUS to measured pure component. and other property reports when you do not want to perform a flowsheet simulation in the same run. with third-party commercial engineering programs. LLE. PROPERTIES PLUS Property Analysis Property Estimation Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 40 ©1998 AspenTech. assay data analysis. All rights reserved. and/or property analysis calculations. ASPEN PLUS cannot perform data regression in a Flowsheet run. PROPERTIES PLUS setup run Use PROPERTIES PLUS to prepare a property package for use with Aspen Custom Modeler (formerly SPEEDUP) or Aspen Pinch (formerly ADVENT). You must be licensed to use PROPERTIES PLUS. A standalone Property Analysis run Use Property Analysis to generate property tables. PT-envelopes. residue curve maps.

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 41 ©1998 AspenTech. 2. Global Level (“Input Data” & “Output Results” fields on the Setup Specifications Global sheet) Object level (“Units” field in the top of any input form of an object such as a block or stream Field Level • Users can create their own units sets using the Setup Units Sets Object Manager. 3.Setup Units • Units in Aspen Plus can be defined at 3 different levels: 1. . Units can be copied from an existing set and then modified. Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 42 ©1998 AspenTech. • The Find button can be used to search for components. • The Electrolyte Wizard can be used to set up an electrolyte simulation. etc. • Pure component databanks contain parameters such as molecular weight. Septiembre 12. . • If available. physical property parameters for each component are retrieved from databanks. The databank search order is specified on the Databanks sheet. critical properties.Components • Use the Components Specifications form to specify all the components required for the simulation.

All rights reserved.Components Specifications Form Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 43 ©1998 AspenTech. .

g.Entering Components • The Component ID is used to identify the component in simulation inputs and results. C2H6O-2) .Search using component name.. boiling point.g. formula. . or CAS number. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 44 ©1998 AspenTech. e.Formula: Chemical formula of component (e. • Each Component ID can be associated with a databank component as either: .g. All rights reserved. C6H6) (Note that a suffix is added to formulas when there are isomers. BENZENE) • Databank components can be searched for using the Find button. . component class. molecular weight.Component Name: Full name of component (e.All components containing specified items will be listed. Septiembre 12.. .

Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 45 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Find • Find performs an AND search when more than one criterion is specified. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® .

5-6 Databank delivered with Aspen Plus 8.3 Data from the Design Institute for Physical Property Data (DIPPR) and AspenTech delivered with Aspen Plus 8. All rights reserved. and other solids Use Primary component databank in Aspen Plus Simulations containing electrolytes Simulations containing electrolytes and solids Solids.5-6 PURE856 For upward compatibility ASPENPCD For upward compatibility Parameters missing from the first selected databank will be searched for in subsequent selected databanks. Septiembre 12. salts. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 46 ©1998 AspenTech. liquid and solid states PURE93 Data from the Design Institute for Physical Property Data (DIPPR) and AspenTech delivered with Aspen Plus 9. and metallurgy applications For upward compatibility INORGANIC Thermochemical properties for inorganic components in vapor. electrolytes.Pure Component Databanks Databank Contents PURE10 AQUEOUS SOLIDS Data from the Design Institute for Physical Property Data (DIPPR) and AspenTech Pure component parameters for ionic and molecular species in aqueous solution Pure component parameters for strong electrolytes. .

Properties • Use the Properties Specifications form to specify the physical property methods to be used in the simulation. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 47 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. . • Property methods are a collection of models and methods used to describe pure component and mixture behavior. • Choosing the right physical properties is critical for obtaining reliable simulation results. • Selecting a Process Type will narrow the number of methods available.

Properties Specifications Form Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 48 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.

Pressure .Vapor Fraction • To specify stream composition enter either: .Streams • Use Stream Input forms to specify the feed stream conditions and composition.Individual component flows • Specifications for streams that are not feeds to the flowsheet are used as estimates. .Temperature .Total stream flow and component fractions . All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 49 ©1998 AspenTech. • To specify stream conditions enter two of the following: .

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 50 ©1998 AspenTech.Streams Input Form Septiembre 12. .

Septiembre 12. • Some unit operation models require additional specification forms • All unit operation models have optional information forms (e. BlockOptions form).Blocks • Each Block Input or Block Setup form specifies operating conditions and equipment specifications for the unit operation model. All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 51 ©1998 AspenTech.g.

Block Form Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 52 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

.The Next button will take you to any incomplete forms.The simulation can be executed when all required forms are complete. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 53 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved. .Starting the Run • Select Control Panel from the View menu or press the Next button to be prompted.

A message window showing the progress of the simulation by displaying the most recent messages from the calculations .A toolbar which you can use to control the simulation Run Step Stop Reinitialize Results Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.Control Panel The Control Panel consists of: .A status area showing the hierarchy and order of simulation blocks and convergence loops executed . . 2001 ® Start or continue calculations Step through the flowsheet one block at a time Pause simulation calculations Purge simulation results Check simulation results Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 54 ©1998 AspenTech.

Contains calculated block operating conditions (bring up the block folder in the Data Browser and select the Results form) Septiembre 12.Reviewing Results • History file or Control Panel Messages . .Contains stream conditions and compositions the Data Browser and select the Results form) • For all streams (/Data/Results Summary/Streams) • For individual streams (bring up the stream folder in • Block Results .Select History or Control Panel on the View menu to display the History file or the Control Panel • Stream Results .Contains any generated errors or warnings . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 55 ©1998 AspenTech.

- Starting with the flowsheet created in the Benzene Flowsheet Definition Workshop (saved as BENZENE. Septiembre 12. add the process and feed stream conditions as shown on the next page. Questions: 1.Benzene Flowsheet Conditions Workshop Objective: Add the process and feed stream conditions to a flowsheet. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 56 ©1998 AspenTech.BKP). What is the heat duty of the block “COOL”? _________ 2. All rights reserved. What is the temperature in the second flash block “FL2”? _________ Note: Answers for all of the workshops are located in the very back of the course notes in Appendix C. 2001 ® .

Benzene Flowsheet Conditions Workshop VAP1 COOL FL1 FEED COOL T = 100 F P = 500 psia FL2 LIQ1 VAP2 Feed T = 1000 F P = 550 psia T = 200 F Pdrop = 0 P = 1 atm Q=0 Hydrogen: 405 lbmol/hr Methane: 95 lbmol/hr Benzene: 95 lbmol/hr Toluene: 5 lbmol/hr LIQ2 Use the PENG-ROB Property Method Septiembre 12.BKP Slide 57 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. 2001 ® When finished. Introduction to Aspen Plus . save as filename: BENZENE.

Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 58 ©1998 AspenTech.

All rights reserved. Unit Operation Models • Unit Operation Models Reference Manual Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. 59 . Chapter 10.Reach Your Potential True Unit Operation Models Objective: Review major types of unit operation models Aspen Plus References: • User Guide.

• Aspen Plus Unit Operation Models Reference Manual Septiembre 12.Unit Operation Model Types • Mixers/Splitters • Separators • Heat Exchangers • Columns • Reactors • Pressure Changers • Manipulators • Solids • User Models Reference: The use of specific models is best described by on-line help and the documentation. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 60 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

bleed valves FSplit SSplit Stream splitter Substream splitter Septiembre 12. adding work streams Stream splitters. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 61 ©1998 AspenTech.Mixers/Splitters Model Mixer Description Stream mixer Purpose Combine multiple streams into one stream Split stream flows Split substream flows Use Mixing tees. All rights reserved. adding heat streams. stream mixing operations. . bleed valves Solid stream splitters.

. when the details of the separation are unknown or unimportant Sep Sep2 Septiembre 12. single stage separators Decanters. knockout drums. evaporators. single stage separators with two liquid phases Decanters. All rights reserved. single stage separators with two liquid phases and no vapor phase Component separation operations such as distillation and absorption. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 62 ©1998 AspenTech.Separators Model Flash2 Flash3 Decanter Description Purpose Two-outlet flash Determine thermal and phase conditions Three-outlet flash Liquid-liquid decanter Multi-outlet component separator Two-outlet component separator Determine thermal and phase conditions Determine thermal and phase conditions Separate inlet stream components into any number of outlet streams Separate inlet stream components into two outlet streams Use Flashes. when the details of the separation are unknown or unimportant Component separation operations such as distillation and absorption.

LNG exchangers. coolers. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 63 ©1998 AspenTech. Model economizers and the convection section of fired heaters. HeatX MHeatX Hetran* Aerotran* * ® Requires separate license Septiembre 12.Heat Exchangers Model Heater Description Purpose Heater or cooler Determines thermal and phase conditions Two-stream heat exchanger Multistream heat exchanger Interface to B-JAC Hetran program Interface to B-JAC Aerotran program Exchange heat between two streams Exchange heat between any number of streams Design and simulate shell and tube heat exchangers Design and simulate air-cooled heat exchangers Use Heaters. Rating shell and tube heat exchangers when geometry is known. Two-stream heat exchangers. Shell and tube heat exchangers with a wide variety of configurations. valves. Air-cooled heat exchangers with a wide variety of configurations. Two-stream heat exchangers. Pumps and compressors when work-related results are not needed. All rights reserved. . Multiple hot and cold stream heat exchangers.

stages. duty using fractionation indices.Shortcut Model DSTWU Description Purpose Use Shortcut distillation Determine minimum RR. Columns with one feed and two product streams Distl SCFrac Complex columns. fractionation stages per section. Shortcut distillation Determine separation rating based on RR. All rights reserved. and D:F ratio using Edmister method. Shortcut distillation Determine product for petroleum composition and flow. Columns with one feed and design minimum stages. . and either two product streams actual RR or actual stages by Winn-UnderwoodGilliland method.Columns . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 64 ©1998 AspenTech. such as crude units and vacuum towers Septiembre 12.

catalytic cracker or coker fractionator. 3-phase. and reactive batch distillation MultiFrac PetroFrac Rigorous rating and design for petroleum refining applications BatchFrac*+ RateFrac* Rigorous batch distillation Rate-based distillation Liquid-liquid extraction Rigorous rating calculations for single batch columns Rigorous rating and design for single Distillation columns. air separators. ethylene fractionator and quench towers Ordinary azeotropic batch distillation. columns extractive and azeotropic distillation. reactive distillation Rigorous rating and design for multiple columns of any complexity Heat integrated columns. ethylene primary fractionator/quench tower combinations. heat integrated units. . atmospheric crude unit. absorbers.0 Septiembre 12. strippers. vacuum unit. All rights reserved. nonequilibrium calculations petroleum applications Rigorous rating for liquid-liquid extraction columns Liquid-liquid extraction Extract * ® Requires separate license + Input language only in Version 10. strippers. and multiple columns. vacuum lube fractionator. Based on reactive systems. petroleum refining Preflash tower. absorber/stripper combinations. absorbers.Columns . 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 65 ©1998 AspenTech.Rigorous Model RadFrac Description Purpose Rigorous fractionation Rigorous fractionation for complex columns Petroleum refining fractionation Use Rigorous rating and design for single Distillation.

Includes solid phase equilibrium. or three-phase stirred tank reactors with kinetics reactions in the vapor or liquid One. two. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 66 ©1998 AspenTech.Reactors Model RStoic Description Stoichiometric reactor Yield reactor Purpose Stoichiometric reactor with specified reaction extent or conversion Use Reactors where the kinetics are unknown or unimportant but stoichiometry and extent are known RYield Reactor with specified yield Reactors where the stoichiometry and kinetics are unknown or unimportant but yield distribution is known Chemical and phase equilibrium by stoichiometric calculations Chemical and phase equilibrium by Gibbs energy minimization Continuous stirred tank reactor Plug flow reactor Single. two.and two-phase chemical equilibrium and simultaneous phase equilibrium Chemical and/or simultaneous phase and chemical equilibrium. Plug flow reactions with external coolant. Batch and semi-batch reactors where the reaction kinetics are known REquil Equilibrium reactor RGibbs Equilibrium reactor RCSTR RPlug Continuous stirred tank reactor Plug flow reactor RBatch Batch reactor Batch or semi-batch reactor Septiembre 12. . One. or three-phase plug flow reactors with kinetic reactions in any phase.

power requirement or performance curve is known Change stream pressure when the pressure. steady-state and fully developed pipeline flow with fittings Multi-phase. Multi-phase. power requirement or performance curve is known Change stream pressure across multiple stages with intercoolers. steady-state and fully developed pipeline flow Slide 67 ©1998 AspenTech. isentropic turbines. isentropic turbines. All rights reserved. one dimensional. MCompr Multi-stage compressor or turbine Valve Pipe Control valve Single-segment pipe Multi-segment pipe Pipeline Septiembre 12. Multistage polytropic compressors. polytropic positive displacement compressors. adiabatic flow in ball. polytropic positive compressors. 2001 ® . Allows for liquid knockout streams from intercoolers Determine pressure drop or valve coefficient (CV) Determine pressure drop and heat transfer in single-segment pipe or annular space Determine pressure drop and heat transfer in multi-segment pipe or annular space Introduction to Aspen Plus Use Pumps and hydraulic turbines Compr Polytropic compressors. one dimensional. isentropic compressors. globe and butterfly valves Multi-phase.Pressure Changers Model Description Purpose Pump Pump or hydraulic turbine Compressor or turbine Change stream pressure when the pressure. isentropic compressors.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 68 ©1998 AspenTech.Manipulators Model Mult Dupl Description Purpose Use Multiply streams for scale-up or scale-down Duplicate streams to look at different scenarios in the same flowsheet Link sections or blocks that use different stream classes Stream multiplier Multiply stream flows by a user supplied factor Stream duplicator Stream class changer Copy a stream to any number of outlets Change stream class ClChng Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved.

Septiembre 12. and single or multiple roll crushers Solids-solids separation using screens Gas-solids separation using fabric filters Gas-solids separation using cyclones Gas-solids separation using venturi scrubbers Gas-solids separation using dry electrostatic precipitators Liquid-solids separation using hydrocyclones Liquid-solids separation using centrifuge filters Liquid-solids separation using continuous rotary vacuum filters Single-stage solids washer Multistage washer or a counter-current decanter Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 69 ©1998 AspenTech. 2001 ® . cage mill breaker.Solids Model Crystallizer Crusher Screen FabFl Cyclone VScrub ESP HyCyc CFuge Filter SWash CCD Description Continuous Crystallizer Crushers Screens Fabric filters Cyclones Venturi scrubbers Dry electrostatic precipitators Hydrocyclones Centrifuge filters Rotary vacuum filters Single-stage solids washer Counter-current decanter Uses Mixed suspension. All rights reserved. mixed product removal (MSMPR) crystallizeer used for the production of a single solid product Gyratory/jaw crusher.

Septiembre 12. User-defined names can be associated with variables. All rights reserved. Aspen Plus helper functions eliminate the need to know the internal data structure to retrieve variables. Variables can be dimensioned based on other input specifications (for example. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 70 ©1998 AspenTech. Excel Workbooks or Fortran code can be used to define the User2 unit operation model. number of components).User Models • • • • • ® Proprietary models or 3-rd party software can be included in an Aspen Plus flowsheet using a User2 unit operation block. 2001 .

Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 71 ©1998 AspenTech. Inlet and outlet streams must have the same name in the subflowsheet and in the main flowsheet. Each ID (block. design-spec. All rights reserved. Components must be identical in all flowsheets.Subflowsheets • • • • • ® Existing simulations (*. 2001 . etc.bkp or *. stream.apw files) can be used as part of a new flowsheet Select “Subflowsheet” from the User Model tab of the Model Library to create a subflowsheet in the main flowsheet. Septiembre 12.) must be unique.

All rights reserved. Any data entered for the block will be associated with that model.Model Templating • • • Custom model libraries containing categorized groups of models can be displayed with the Aspen Plus Model Library. Custom icons to better represent the equipment can be created for any model in a custom model library. Any Aspen Plus model on the flowsheet can be added to the custom model library. . Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 72 ©1998 AspenTech.

and selecting “Add to model library” from the list. 3. Edit the library by selecting the library name and Edit from the Library menu. Septiembre 12. clicking the right mouse button. 4. Create a custom model library. by selecting New from the Library menu. 2. Create categories by selecting New from the Category menu.Model Templating (Continued) 1. All rights reserved. 5. Add models to the library by selecting a block on the flowsheet. Select Save from the Library menu to save the library. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 73 ©1998 AspenTech. Enter the name of the library and the location of the library file.

Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 74 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Chapter 4.Reach Your Potential True RadFrac Objective: Discuss the minimum input required for the RadFrac fractionation model. and the use of design specifications and stage efficiencies Aspen Plus References: • Unit Operation Models Reference Manual. Columns Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. 75 .

Any number of feeds . All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 76 ©1998 AspenTech.Total liquid draw off and pumparounds .Ordinary distillation .Any number of heaters .Any number of side draws . reboiled absorption .RadFrac: Rigorous Multistage Separation • Vapor-Liquid or Vapor-Liquid-Liquid phase simulation of: .Azeotropic distillation .Stripping.Any number of decanters Septiembre 12. reboiled stripping .Absorption.Reactive distillation • Configuration options: .

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 77 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. .RadFrac Flowsheet Connectivity Vapor Distillate Top-Stage or Condenser Heat Duty 1 Heat (optional) Liquid Distillate Water Distillate (optional) Feeds Reflux Heat (optional) Pumparound Heat (optional) Heat (optional) Boil-up Bottom Stage or Reboiler Heat Duty Nstage Return Decanters Product Products (optional) Heat (optional) Bottoms Septiembre 12.

Two column operating specifications .Condenser and reboiler configuration .Valid phases . All rights reserved.Number of stages . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 78 ©1998 AspenTech. .Convergence Septiembre 12.RadFrac Setup Configuration Sheet • Specify: .

Feed stream convention (see Help) ABOVE-STAGE: Vapor from feed goes to stage above feed stage Liquid goes to feed stage ON-STAGE: Vapor & Liquid from feed go to specified feed stage Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 79 ©1998 AspenTech.RadFrac Setup Streams Sheet • Specify: .Feed stage location .

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 80 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Feed Convention Above-stage (default) n-1 Vapor Liquid Feed On-stage n-1 n n Feed Septiembre 12.

Section pressure drop Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 81 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Top/Bottom pressure . .RadFrac Setup Pressure Sheet • Specify one of: .Column pressure profile .

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 82 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.BKP Septiembre 12.5 Column pressure = 1 bar Feed stage = 6 FEED T = 65 C P = 1 bar COLUMN BTMS Water: 100 kmol/hr Methanol: 100 kmol/hr Use the NRTL-RK Property Method Filename: RAD-EX.Methanol-Water RadFrac Column OVHD RadFrac specifications Total Condenser Kettle Reboiler 9 Stages Reflux Ratio = 1 Distillate to feed ratio = 0.

Septiembre 12.RadFrac Options • To set up an absorber with no condenser or reboiler. • Either Vaporization or Murphree efficiencies on either a stage or component basis can be specified on the RadFrac Efficiencies form. . • Tray and packed column design and rating is possible. • A Second liquid phase may be modeled if the user selects Vapor-liquid-liquid as Valid phases. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 83 ©1998 AspenTech. set condenser and reboiler to none on the RadFrac Setup Configuration sheet. • Reboiler and condenser heat curves can be generated. All rights reserved.

Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 84 ©1998 AspenTech. Click on the Finish button to generate a plot with default settings.Plot Wizard • Use Plot Wizard (on the Plot menu) to quickly generate plots of results of a simulation. 2001 . All rights reserved. The wizard guides you in the basic operations for generating a plot. Septiembre 12. MultiFrac. PetroFrac and RateFrac • • • ® Click the object of interest in the Data Browser to generate plots for that particular object. Click on the Next button to continue. You can use Plot Wizard for displaying results for the following operations: - Physical property analysis Data regression analysis Profiles for all separation models RadFrac.

25 0. 1 Block COLUMN: Vapor Composition Profiles WATER METHANOL Y (mole frac) 0.5 0. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 85 ©1998 AspenTech.Plot Wizard Demonstration • Use the plot wizard on the column to create a plot of the vapor phase compositions throughout the column. . All rights reserved.75 1 2 3 4 5 Stage 6 7 8 9 Septiembre 12.

” If you get an error message saying that the middle loop was not converged.RadFrac DesignSpecs and Vary • Design specifications can be specified and executed inside the RadFrac block using the DesignSpecs and Vary forms. . be equal to the number of varies. Septiembre 12. • One or more RadFrac inputs can be manipulated to achieve specifications on one or more RadFrac performance parameters. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 86 ©1998 AspenTech. • The number of specs should. All rights reserved. • The DesignSpecs and Varys in a RadFrac are solved in a “Middle loop. in general. check the DesignSpecs and Varys you have entered.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 87 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12. 2. . Check that physical property issues (choice of Property Method. increase the maximum iterations on the RadFrac Convergence Basic sheet. Ensure that column operating conditions are feasible.RadFrac Convergence Problems If a RadFrac column fails to converge. etc. All rights reserved. 3.) are properly addressed. parameter availability. doing one or more of the following could help: 1. If the column err/tol is decreasing fairly consistently.

it is usually beneficial to Reinitialize after making changes. All rights reserved.RadFrac Convergence Problems (Continued) 4. Experiment with different convergence methods on the RadFrac Setup Configuration sheet. . 6. >> When a column does not converge. Provide temperature estimates for some stages in the column using the RadFrac Estimates Temperature sheet (useful for absorbers). 5. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 88 ©1998 AspenTech. Provide composition estimates for some stages in the column using the RadFrac Estimates Liquid Composition and Vapor Composition sheet (useful for highly non-ideal systems). Septiembre 12.

3 BTMS Filename: RADFRAC.1 psi Distillate flowrate = 1245 lbmol/hr Molar reflux ratio = 1.1 psia Pressure drop per stage = 0.2 wt% Water 36.BKP Septiembre 12. .RadFrac Workshop Part A: • Perform a rating calculation of a Methanol tower using the following data: DIST FEED COLUMN Feed: 63. All rights reserved.8 wt% Methanol Total flow = 120. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 89 ©1998 AspenTech.000 lb/hr Pressure 18 psia Saturated liquid Use the NRTL-RK Property Method Column specification: 38 trays (40 stages) Feed tray = 23 (stage 24) Total condenser Top stage pressure = 16.

RadFrac Workshop (Continued) Part B: • Set up design specifications within the column so the following two objectives are met: • 99. Note the condenser and reboiler duties: Condenser Duty :_________ Reboiler Duty :_________ Septiembre 12. Make sure stream compositions are reported as mass fractions before running the problem.95 wt% methanol in the distillate 99. you can vary the distillate rate (8001700 lbmol/hr) and the reflux ratio (0.90 wt% water in the bottoms To achieve these specifications. All rights reserved.8-2). 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 90 ©1998 AspenTech. ® .

(When finished. ® . How do these efficiencies affect the condenser and reboiler duties of the column? Part D: • Perform a tray sizing calculation for the entire column. All rights reserved. save as filename: RADFRAC.RadFrac Workshop (Continued) Part C: • • Perform the same design calculation after specifying a 65% Murphree efficiency for each tray. given that Bubble Cap trays are used. Assume the condenser and reboiler have stage efficiencies of 90%.BKP) Septiembre 12. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 91 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 92 ©1998 AspenTech.Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved.

93 . Chapter 5. and examine in some detail at least one reactor from each class Aspen Plus References: • Unit Operation Models Reference Manual. Reactors Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech.Reach Your Potential True Reactor Models Objective: Introduce the various classes of reactor models available. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. .Reactor Overview Reactors Balance Based RYield RStoic Equilibrium Based REquil RGibbs Kinetics Based RCSTR RPlug RBatch Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 94 ©1998 AspenTech.

g. to simulate a furnace) 1000 lb/hr Coal IN RYield 70 lb/hr H2 O 20 lb/hr CO 2 60 lb/hr CO 250 lb/hr tar 600 lb/hr char OUT Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.Requires a mass balance only.Balanced Based Reactors • RYield . not an atom balance . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 95 ©1998 AspenTech.Is used to simulate reactors in which inlets to the reactor are not completely known but outlets are known (e. .

Requires both an atom and a mass balance . . O2.Balanced Based Reactors (Continued) • RStoic .Used in situations where both the equilibrium data and the kinetics are either unknown or unimportant Can specify or calculate heat of reaction at a reference temperature and pressure C. CO2 OUT Septiembre 12. O2 IN RStoic 2 CO + O2 --> 2 CO2 C + O2 --> CO2 2 C + O2 --> 2 CO C. All rights reserved. CO. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 96 ©1998 AspenTech.

All rights reserved.Equilibrium Based Reactors • GENERAL .Do not take reaction kinetics into account . a few known reactions. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 97 ©1998 AspenTech. .Useful when there are many components.Cannot do a 3-phase flash . but problem specifications are different Individual reactions can be at a restricted equilibrium • REquil .Solve similar problems. and when relatively few components take part in the reactions Septiembre 12.Computes combined chemical and phase equilibrium by solving reaction equilibrium equations .

Gibbs Energy Minimization A Gibbs free energy minimization is done to determine the product composition at which the Gibbs free energy of the products is at a minimum. . Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 98 ©1998 AspenTech. Solid Equilibrium RGibbs is the only Aspen Plus block that will deal with solid-liquid-gas phase equilibrium.Unknown Reactions This feature is quite useful when reactions occurring are not known or are high in number due to many components participating in the reactions.Equilibrium Based Reactors (Continued) • RGibbs .

The current built-in models are . • Reactions are specified using a Reaction ID. .Kinetic Reactors • Kinetic reactors are RCSTR. • Kinetics can be specified using one of the built-in models. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 99 ©1998 AspenTech.Langmuir-Hinshelwood-Hougen-Watson (LHHW) • A catalyst for a reaction can have a reaction coefficient of zero. • Reaction kinetics are taken into account.Power Law . RPlug and RBatch. or with a user subroutine. Septiembre 12. and hence must be specified.

• A single Reaction ID can be referenced in any number of kinetic reactors (RCSTR.Using a Reaction ID • Reaction IDs are setup as objects. . go to the Reactions Reactions Object Manager Septiembre 12.) • To set up a Reaction ID. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 100 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. and then referenced within the reactor(s). RPlug and RBatch. separate from the reactor.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 101 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. .Power-law Rate Expression rate = k * ∏ [ c o n c e n t r a ti o n i ]exponent i  Activation Energy  1 1   T  k = (Pre − exponentia l Factor)   exp  −  −  T   R T T0    0    n i Example:  → 2 A + 3 B ← C + 2 D 2 k k1 Forward reaction: (Assuming the reaction is 2nd order in A) coefficients: A: -2 B: -3 C: 1 D: 2 exponents: A: 2 B: 0 C: 0 D: 0 Reverse reaction: (Assuming the reaction is 1st order in C and D) coefficients: C: -1 D: -2 A: 2 B: 3 exponents: C: 1 D: 1 A: 0 B: 0 Septiembre 12.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 102 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. • If you have a heat of reaction value that does not match the value calculated by Aspen Plus. • Heats of reaction are typically calculated as the difference between inlet and outlet enthalpies for the reactor (see Appendix A). Septiembre 12.Heats of Reaction • Heats of reaction need not be provided for reactions. • Heats of reaction can also be calculated or specified at a reference temperature and pressure in an RStoic reactor. . you can adjust the heats of formation (DHFORM) of one or more components to make the heats of reaction match.

Factor = 1. Composition basis is Molarity.95 x 10 7 J/kmol Reverse Reaction: Pre-exp.95 x 107 J/kmol Reactions are first order with respect to each of the reactants in the reaction (second order overall). Reactions occur in the liquid phase.Reactor Workshop Objective: Compare the use of different reactor types to model one reaction. Energy = 5.9 x 108. Hint: Check that each reactor is considering both Vapor and Liquid as Valid phases. Act. Factor = 5. Energy = 5. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 103 ©1998 AspenTech.0 x 107.Act. . All rights reserved. Reactor Conditions: Temperature = 70 C Pressure = 1 atm Stoichiometry: Ethanol + Acetic Acid < --> Ethyl Acetate + Water Kinetic Parameters: Forward Reaction: Pre-exp. Septiembre 12.

3 meters P-CSTR When finished.892 kmol/hr Ethanol: 186.14 Cu. save as filename: REACTORS. All rights reserved. 2001 ® RCSTR Volume = 0.59 kmol/hr Acetic Acid: 192.Reactor Workshop (Continued) Use the NRTL-RK property method P-STOIC F-STOIC RSTOIC 70 % conversion of ethanol FEED Feed: Temp = 70 C DUPL Pres = 1 atm Water: 8. Slide 104 ©1998 AspenTech.BKP Septiembre 12. Introduction to Aspen Plus . M.6 kmol/hr F-GIBBS P-GIBBS RGIBBS F-PLUG RPLUG F-CSTR P-PLUG Length = 2 meters Diameter = 0.

All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 105 ©1998 AspenTech.Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved. 106 .Reach Your Potential True Cyclohexane Production Workshop Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 107 ©1998 AspenTech. The reactor effluent is cooled and the light gases separated from the product stream. A portion of the cyclohexane product is recycled to the reactor to aid in temperature control. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. The liquid product stream from the separator is fed to a distillation column to further remove any dissolved light gases and to stabilize the end product.8%. Assume a benzene conversion of 99.Cyclohexane Production Workshop Objective: Create a flowsheet to model a cyclohexane production process Cyclohexane can be produced by the hydrogenation of benzene in the following reaction: C6H 6 Benzene + 3 H2 Hydrogen = C6 H12 Cyclohexane The benzene and hydrogen feeds are combined with recycle hydrogen and cyclohexane before entering a fixed bed catalytic reactor. . Part of the light gas stream is fed back to the reactor as recycle hydrogen.

02 92% flow to stream H2RCY H2RCY VFLOW H2IN VAP FEED-MIX RXIN T = 150C P = 23 bar REACT HP-SEP RXOUT T = 200 C Pdrop = 1 bar Benzene conv = 0.005 CH4 = 0. All rights reserved. save as filename: CYCLOHEX.9999 by varying Bottoms rate from 97 to 101 kmol/hr Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 108 ©1998 AspenTech.BKP Septiembre 12.Cyclohexane Production Workshop C6 H6 + 3 H2 = C 6H12 Benzene Hydrogen Cyclohexane PURGE Total flow = 330 kmol/hr T = 50 C P = 25 bar Molefrac H2 = 0.5 bar LTENDS Theoretical Stages = 12 Reflux ratio = 1.2 Bottoms rate = 99 kmol/hr Partial Condenser with vapor distillate only Column Pressure = 15 bar Feed stage = 8 BZIN T = 40 C P = 1 bar Benzene flow = 100 kmol/hr LIQ COLFD LFLOW CHRCY 30% flow to stream CHRCY Use the RK-SOAVE property method When finished.975 N2 = 0. 2001 ® PRODUCT COLUMN Specify cyclohexane mole recovery of 0.998 T = 50 C Pdrop = 0. .

Chapter 7.Reach Your Potential True Physical Properties Objectives: Introduce the ideas of property methods and physical property parameters Identify issues involved in the choice of a property method Cover the use of Property Analysis for reporting physical properties Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. All rights reserved. Analyzing Properties Introduction to Aspen Plus 109 ® ©1998 AspenTech. Physical Property Parameters and Data • User Guide. Physical Property Methods • User Guide. . Chapter 8. Chapter 29.

000 Activity Coefficient Model Approach 42 880. 2001 ® Equation of State Approach 7 390. 11 520.5 mole % acetone recovery Ideal Approach Predicted number of stages required Approximate cost in dollars Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. OVHD FEED COLUMN 5000 lbmol/hr 10 mole % acetone 90 mole % water BTMS Specification: 99.Acetone Recovery • Correct choice of physical property models and accurate physical property parameters are essential for obtaining accurate simulation results.000 Introduction to Aspen Plus .Case Study .000 Slide 110 ©1998 AspenTech.

How to Establish Physical Properties Choose a Property Method Check Parameters/Obtain Additional Parameters Confirm Results Create the Flowsheet Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 111 ©1998 AspenTech. .

Septiembre 12. • Users can modify existing Property Methods or create new ones. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 112 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Property Methods • A Property Method is a collection of models and methods used to calculate physical properties. . • Property Methods containing commonly used thermodynamic models are provided in Aspen Plus.

. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 113 ©1998 AspenTech.Physical Property Models Approaches to representing physical properties of components Physical Property Models Ideal Equation of State (EOS) Models Activity Coefficient Models Special Models • Choice of model types depends on degree of non-ideal behavior and operating conditions. All rights reserved.

Non-polar components of similar size and shape • What controls degree of non-ideality? .Ideal Gas law and Raoult’s law x • Which systems behave as ideal? . 2001 ® y x Slide 114 ©1998 AspenTech. Introduction to Aspen Plus .Molecular interactions e.g. size and shape of the molecules • How can we study the degree of non-ideality of a system? .Property plots (e.Ideal vs. TXY & XY) y x Septiembre 12. Polarity. All rights reserved. Non-Ideal Behavior • What do we mean by ideal behavior? y .g.

All rights reserved.Comparison of EOS and Activity Models EOS Models Limited in ability to represent non-ideal liquids Fewer binary parameters required Parameters extrapolate reasonably with temperature Consistent in critical region Activity Coefficient Models Can represent highly non-ideal liquids Many binary parameters required Binary parameters are highly temperature dependent Inconsistent in critical region Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 115 ©1998 AspenTech. .

Common Property Methods • Equation of State Property Methods - PENG-ROB - RK-SOAVE • Activity Coefficient Property Methods - NRTL - UNIFAC - UNIQUAC - WILSON

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 116
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Henry's Law • Henry's Law is only used with ideal and activity coefficient
models.

• It is used to determine the amount of a supercritical
component or light gas in the liquid phase.

• Any supercritical components or light gases (CO2, N2,
etc.) should be declared as Henry's components (Components Henry Comps Selection sheet).

• The Henry's components list ID should be entered on
Properties Specifications Global sheet in the Henry Components field.

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 117
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Choosing a Property Method - Review
Do you have any polar components in your system? N Use EOS Model Y Y Are the operating conditions near the critical region of the mixture? N Do you have light gases or supercritical components in your system?
Reference: Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 7, Physical Property Methods, gives similar, more detailed guidelines for choosing a Property Method.
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Y Use activity coefficient model with Henry’s Law
Introduction to Aspen Plus

N Use activity coefficient model
Slide 118
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Choosing a Property Method - Example
System
Propane, Ethane, Butane Benzene, Water Acetone, Water

Model Type
EOS Activity Coefficient Activity Coefficient

Property Method
RK-SOAVE, PENG-ROB NRTL-RK, UNIQUAC NRTL-RK, WILSON

Choose an appropriate Property Method for the following systems of components at ambient conditions.
System
Ethanol, Water Benzene, Toluene Acetone, Water, Carbon Dioxide Water, Cyclohexane Ethane and Propanol
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Property Method

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 119
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

How to Establish Physical Properties
Choose a Property Method

Check Parameters/Obtain Additional Parameters

Confirm Results

Create the Flowsheet

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 120
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Pure Component Parameters • Represent attributes of a single component • Input in the Properties Parameters Pure Component
folder.

• Stored in databanks such as PURE10, ASPENPCD,
SOLIDS, etc. (The selected databanks are listed on the Components Specifications Databanks sheet.)

• Parameters retrieved into the Graphical User Interface by
selecting Retrieve Parameter Results from the tools menu.

• Examples - Scalar: MW for molecular weight - Temperature-Dependent: PLXANT for parameters in
the extended Antoine vapor pressure model
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 121
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Binary Parameters • Used to describe interactions between two components • Input in the Properties Parameters Binary Interaction
folder

• Stored in binary databanks such as VLE-IG, LLE-ASPEN • Parameter values from the databanks can be viewed on
the input forms in the Graphical User Interface.

• Parameter forms that include data from the databanks
must be viewed before the flowsheet is complete.

• Examples - Scalar: RKTKIJ for the Rackett model - Temperature-Dependent: NRTL for parameters in the
NRTL model
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 122
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Displaying Property Parameters • • • •
Aspen Plus does not display all databank parameters on the parameter input forms. Select Retrieve Parameter Results from the Tools menu to retrieve all parameters for the components and property methods defined in the simulation. All results that are currently loaded will be lost. They can be regenerated by running the simulation again. The parameters are viewed on the Properties Parameters Results forms.

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 123
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Reporting Physical Property Parameters Follow this procedure to obtain a report file containing values of ALL pure component and binary parameters for ALL components used in a simulation: 1. select All physical property parameters used (in SI units) or select Property parameters’ descriptions. and sources of data. 3. (From the Graphical User Interface. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 124 ©1998 AspenTech. 2. Edit the . .) The parameters are listed under the heading PARAMETER VALUES in the physical properties section of the report file. export a report (*.rep) file (Select Export from the File menu). equations. Septiembre 12. On the Setup Report Options Property sheet. After running the simulation. you can choose Report from the View menu.rep file using any text editor. All rights reserved.

Output is quite long. Equations for temperaturedependent parameters are listed. Septiembre 12. and sources of data Parameters are reported in output-units. with a description is printed Output is fairly compact. All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 125 ©1998 AspenTech. and the units of the parameters are printed.Parameter Reports All physical property parameters used (in SI units) Parameters are reported in SI units. equations. and the units of the parameters are not printed. Only Aspen Plus abbreviations for Aspen Plus abbreviation along the parameter names are printed. Property parameters’ descriptions.

All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 126 ©1998 AspenTech.How to Establish Physical Properties Choose a Property Method Check Parameters/Obtain Additional Parameters Confirm Results Create the Flowsheet Septiembre 12.

Ternary residue maps Select Analysis from the Tools menu to start Analysis.Property Analysis • Used to generate simple property diagrams to validate physical property models and data • • • • • ® Diagram Types: . Property analysis input and results can be saved as a form for later reference and use. Additional binary plots are available under the Plot Wizard button on result form containing raw data. temperature . When using a binary analysis to check for liquid-liquid phase separation.g. remember to choose Vapor-LiquidLiquid as Valid phases.Binary.Pure component. Vapor pressure vs. e. TXY. Septiembre 12. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 127 ©1998 AspenTech. e.g. All rights reserved. . PXY .

4 0. 4 (PRES = 14. 0 8 0 A 6 0 0 P 4 V 0 2 Septiembre 12.7 PSI) 0 0 0 0 1 (PRES = 14.6 0.7 PSI) 0 0.2 0.6 0.Property Analysis .6 0. XY Plot Showing 2 liquid phases: y-x diagram for TOLUENE / WATER . . All rights reserved. .2 0.8 1 LIQUID MOLEFRAC TOLUENE . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus P A .4 0. 2 0. Slide 128 ©1998 AspenTech.7 PSI) 6 8 .Common Plots Ideal XY Plot: y-x diagram for METHANOL / PROPANOL XY Plot Showing Azeotrope: y-x diagram for ETHANOL / TOLUENE 1 0 0 0 0 V 0 0. .4 0. .2 0.8 1 LIQUID MOLEFRAC ETHANOL .8 1 LIQUID MOLEFRAC METHANOL V (PRES = 14. . 1 A . .

Additional Data from DETHERM • DETHERM databank is maintained by DECHEMA.Caloric properties .Excess properties . All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.PVT data . • DETHERM contains the world’s most comprehensive single source of thermophysical properties. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 129 ©1998 AspenTech. . • Users are charged for each set of data that is downloaded.Phase equilibria data .Electrolyte data • The interface can be launched from within Aspen Plus to access data via the Internet or CD-ROM.Transport properties .Azeotropic data . . • Data can be regressed using Aspen Plus Data Regression.

Select the data sets from the list of data. 4. .Interface to DETHERM Example 1. 7. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 130 ©1998 AspenTech. 5. 6. . Click on the DETHERM Interface button on the toolbar.Temperature dependent and Binary data sets are entered on the Properties Data forms. Receive the data into Aspen Plus. . Septiembre 12. 3. Enter your components on the Components Specifications Selection sheet. All rights reserved. Click on the Transfer button. Click on the Search button in the DETHERM interface. 2. Enter your user ID information.Scalar data is entered on Property Parameters forms.

.Interface to DETHERM Example Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 131 ©1998 AspenTech.

All rights reserved.Interface to DETHERM Example Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 132 ©1998 AspenTech.

com/partner/. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 133 ©1998 AspenTech.Interface to the DETHERM Databank • For more information . . All rights reserved.The AspenTech partnership with DECHEMA .Download and usage of DETHERM Internet Client .aspentech.How to sign up for an account http://www. (then click on DECHEMA) Septiembre 12.

.How to Establish Physical Properties Choose a Property Method Check Parameters/Obtain Additional Parameters Confirm Results Create the Flowsheet Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 134 ©1998 AspenTech.

Regression of experimental data (Data Regression) .Physical Property Analysis Septiembre 12.Review 1. Choose Property Method . Confirm Results . Check Parameters .Determine parameters available in Aspen Plus databanks 3.Operating conditions in simulation . .Verify choice of Property Method and physical property data using . All rights reserved.Select a Property Method based on .Components present in simulation .Establishing Physical Properties .Literature searches .Available data or parameters for the components 2. Obtain Additional Parameters (if necessary) .Parameters that are needed can be obtained from . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 135 ©1998 AspenTech.Property Constant Estimation (Property Estimation) 4.

• Use property sets to report thermodynamic. or set.Stream reports . etc.Heating/cooling curves (Flash2.Physical property tables (Property Analysis) .Tray properties (RadFrac. MultiFrac.) . etc. All rights reserved. MHeatX.Property Sets • A property set (Prop-Set) is a way of accessing a collection. Fortran blocks. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 136 ©1998 AspenTech. Only the name of the property set is referenced when using the properties in an application. transport.) Septiembre 12.Design specifications. • Current property set applications include: . and other property values. sensitivity . of properties as an object with a usergiven name.

Properties included in Prop-Sets • Properties commonly included in property sets include: - VFRAC - Molar vapor fraction of a stream - BETA - Fraction of liquid in a second liquid phase - CPMX - Constant pressure heat capacity for a mixture - MUMX - Viscosity for a mixture • Available properties include: - Thermodynamic properties of components in a mixture - Pure component thermodynamic properties - Transport properties - Electrolyte properties - Petroleum-related properties
Reference: Aspen Plus Physical Property Data Reference Manual, Chapter 4, Property Sets, has a complete list of properties that can be included in a property set.
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 137
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Specifying Property Sets • Use the Properties Prop-Sets form to specify properties in
a property set.

• The Search button can be used to search for a property. • All specified qualifiers apply to each property specified,
where applicable.

• Users can define new properties on the Properties
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Advanced User-Properties form by providing a Fortran subroutine.
Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 138
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Predefined Property Sets
Some simulation Templates contain predefined property sets. The following table lists predefined property sets and the types of properties they contain for the General Template:
Predefined Property Set
HXDESIGN THERMAL TXPORT VLE VLLE

Types of Properties
Heat exchanger design Mixture thermal (HMX, CPMX, KMX) Transport Vapor-liquid equilibrium (PHIMX, GAMMA, PL) Vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 139
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Stream Results Options

• On the Setup Report Options Stream sheet, use: - Flow Basis and Fraction Basis check-boxes to specify how stream composition is reported - Property Sets button to specify names of property
sets containing additional properties to be reported for each stream
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 140
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Definition of Terms • Property Method - Set of property models and methods
used to calculate the properties required for a simulation

• • • •

Property - Calculated physical property value such as mixture enthalpy Property Model - Equation or equations used to calculate a physical property Property Parameter - Constant used in a property model Property Set (Prop-Set) - A method of accessing properties so that they can be used or tabulated elsewhere

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 141
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Physical Properties Workshop
Objective: Simulate a two-liquid phase settling tank and investigate the physical properties of the system.
A refinery has a settling tank that they use to decant off the water from a mixture of water and a heavy oil. The inlet stream to the tank also contains some carbon-dioxide and nitrogen. The tank and feed are at ambient temperature and pressure (70o F, 1atm), and have the following flow rates of the various components: Water Oil CO2 N2 515 lb/hr 4322 lb/hr 751 lb/hr 43 lb/hr

Use the compound n-decane to represent the oil. It is known that water and oil form two liquid phases under the conditions in the tank.
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 142
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Physical Properties Workshop (Continued)
1. Choose an appropriate Property Method to represent this system. Check to see that the required binary physical property parameters are available. 2. Using the property analysis feature, verify that the chosen physical property model and the available parameters predict the formation of 2 liquid phases. 3. Set up a simulation to model the settling tank. Use a Flash3 block to represent the tank. 4. Modify the stream report to include the constant pressure heat capacity (CPMX) for each phase (Vapor, 1st Liquid and 2nd Liquid), and the fraction of liquid in a second liquid phase (BETA), for all streams. 5. Retrieve the physical property parameters used in the simulation and determine the critical temperature for carbon dioxide and water. TC(carbon dioxide) = _______; TC(water) = _______
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 143
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Physical Properties Workshop (Continued)
Optional Part: Objective: Generate a table of compositions for each liquid phase (1st Liquid and 2nd Liquid) at different temperatures for a mixture of water and oil. Tabulate the vapor pressure of the components in the same table.

• • • •

In addition to the interactive Analysis commands under the Tools menu, you also can create a Property Analysis manually, using forms. Manually generated Properties Analyses are created using the Properties Analysis Object Manager. Manually created Property Analyses can be executed at the end of a flowsheet simulation or as a stand-alone run using a Run-Type of Property Analysis. A manually generated Generic Property Analysis is similar to the interactive Analysis commands, however it is more flexible regarding input and reporting. Detailed instructions are on the following slide.
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 144
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

®

Physical Properties Workshop (Continued)
Problem Specifications: 1. Create a Generic type property analysis. 2. Generate points along a flash curve. 3. Define component flows of 50 mole water and 50 mole oil. 4. Set Valid phases to Vapor-liquid-liquid. 5. Vary the temperature from 50 to 400 F. 6. Use a vapor fraction of zero. 7. Tabulate a new property set that includes:

a. Mole fraction of water and oil in the 1st and 2nd liquid phases
b. Mole flow of water and oil in the 1st and 2nd liquid phases c. Beta - the fraction of the 1st liquid to the total liquid d. Pure component vapor pressures of water and oil
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 145
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 146
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Reach Your

Potential

True

Accessing Variables
Objective: Become familiar with referencing flowsheet variables
Aspen Plus References: User Guide, Chapter 18, Accessing Flowsheet Variables

®

Related Topics: • User Guide, Chapter 20, Sensitivity • User Guide, Chapter 21, Design Specifications • User Guide, Chapter 19, Fortran Blocks and In-Line Fortran • User Guide, Chapter 22, Optimization Introduction to Aspen Plus • User Guide, Chapter 23, Fitting a Simulation Model to Data

©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

147

Why Access Variables?
OVHD

FEED

COLUMN

BTMS

• •

What is the effect of the reflux ratio of the column on the purity (mole fraction of component B) of the distillate? To perform this analysis, references must be made to 2 flowsheet quantities, i.e. 2 flowsheet variables must be accessed: 1. The reflux ratio of the column 2. The mole fraction of component B in the stream OVHD
Septiembre 12, 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 148
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

®

Accessing Variables • An accessed variable is a reference to a particular
flowsheet quantity, e.g. temperature of a stream or duty of a block.

• Accessed variables can be read from, written to, or both. • Flowsheet result variables (calculated quantities) should
not be overwritten or varied.

• The concept of accessing variables is used in sensitivity
analyses, design specifications, in-line Fortran, optimization, etc.

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 149
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Variable Categories
Variable Category
Blocks Streams

Type of Variable
Block variables and vectors Stream variables and vectors. Both non-component variables and component dependent flow and composition variables can be accessed. Parameters, balance block and pressure relief variables Property parameters Reactions and chemistry variables Costing variables

Model Utility Property Reactions Costing

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 150
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

select the variable category and Aspen Plus will display the other fields necessary to complete the variable definition. specify the variables on the Variable Definition dialog box. On the Variable Definition dialog box. Design specification or Sensitivity form. 2001 ® . click the right mouse button on the Variable Name field. All rights reserved.Variable Definition Dialog Box • • • • When completing a Define sheet. On the popup menu. click Rename. Septiembre 12. such as on a Fortran. If you are editing an existing variable and want to change the variable name. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 151 ©1998 AspenTech. You cannot modify the variables on the Define sheet itself.

it should be read using the variable QCALC. All rights reserved. Only streams that are feeds to the flowsheet should be varied or modified directly. that duty can be read and written using the variable DUTY for that block. PRES is the specified pressure or pressure drop. 4. If the Mass-Frac. and PDROP is pressure drop used in calculating pressure profile in heating or cooling curves. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 152 ©1998 AspenTech. If the duty for a block is calculated during simulation. 2. To modify the composition of a stream. Mole-Flow or StdVol-Flow of the desired component. Mole-Frac or StdVol-Frac of a component in a stream is accessed. it should not be modified. . access and modify the Mass-Flow.Notes 1. If duty is specified for a block. 3.

Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 153 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. Chapter 19. Fortran Blocks and In-Line Fortran Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. 154 . Sensitivity Related Topics: • User Guide. Chapter 18. Chapter 20.Reach Your Potential True Sensitivity Analysis Objective: Introduce the use of sensitivity analysis to study relationships between process variables Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. Accessing Flowsheet Variables • User Guide.

• Results can be viewed by looking at the Results form in the folder for the Sensitivity block. All rights reserved. . • Changes made to a flowsheet input quantity in a sensitivity block do not affect the simulation. The sensitivity study is run independently of the base-case simulation.Sensitivity Analysis • Allows user to study the effect of changes in input variables on process outputs. • Located under /Data/Model Analysis Tools/Sensitivity Septiembre 12. • Results may be graphed to easily visualize relationships between different variables. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 155 ©1998 AspenTech.

. All rights reserved.Sensitivity Analysis Example RECYCLE REACTOR COOL FEED REAC-OUT COOL-OUT SEP Filename: CUMENE-S. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 156 ©1998 AspenTech.BKP PRODUCT What is the effect of cooler outlet temperature on the purity of the product stream? • What is the manipulated (varied) variable? » Cooler outlet temperature • What is the measured (sampled) variable? » Purity (mole fraction) of cumene in product stream Septiembre 12.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 157 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.95 1 Sensitivity S-1 Results Summary 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 VARY 1 COOL PARAM TEMP F Septiembre 12.9 0. .85 0.Sensitivity Analysis Results • What is happening below 75 F and above 300 F? CUMENE PRODUCT PURITY 0.

All rights reserved. .Uses of Sensitivity Analysis • Studying the effect of changes in input variables on process (model) outputs • Graphically representing the effects of input variables • Verifying that a solution to a design specification is feasible • Rudimentary optimization • Studying time varying variables using a quasi-steadystate approach Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 158 ©1998 AspenTech.

Specify range(s) for manipulated (varied) variable(s) .Steps for Using Sensitivity Analysis 1. All rights reserved. 2. 3. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 159 ©1998 AspenTech.These are the flowsheet variables to be varied (Sensitivity Input Vary sheet).Tabulated quantities can be any valid Fortran expression containing variables defined in step 1 (Sensitivity Input Tabulate sheet). 4. Septiembre 12.These are quantities calculated during the simulation to be used in step 4 (Sensitivity Input Define sheet). Specify measured (sampled) variable(s) .Variation for manipulated variable can be specified either as equidistant points within an interval or as a list of values for the variable (Sensitivity Input Vary sheet). Specify quantities to calculate and tabulate . Specify manipulated (varied) variable(s) .

Select Display Plot from the Plot menu. Septiembre 12. 4. 2. All rights reserved. (Optional) Select the column containing the parametric variable and then select Parametric Variable from the Plot menu. » To select a column. . Select the column containing the Y-axis variable and then select Y-Axis Variable from the Plot menu. Select the column containing the X-axis variable and then select X-Axis Variable from the Plot menu. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 160 ©1998 AspenTech.Plotting 1. 3. click on the heading of the column with the left mouse button.

Notes 1. The simulation is run for every combination of manipulated (varied) variables. Septiembre 12. 3. All rights reserved. Only quantities that have been input to the flowsheet should be varied or manipulated. 2. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 161 ©1998 AspenTech. Multiple inputs can be varied. .

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 162 ©1998 AspenTech. Optional Part B: In addition to the fraction split off as recycle (Part A). Note: Both of these studies (parts A and B) should be set up within the same sensitivity analysis block.4. Tabulate the reactor duty and construct a parametric plot showing the dependence of reactor duty on the fraction split off as recycle and conversion of benzene. .Sensitivity Analysis Workshop Objective: Use a sensitivity analysis to study the effect of the recycle flowrate on the reactor duty in the cyclohexane flowsheet Part A: Using the cyclohexane production flowsheet Workshop (saved as CYCLOHEX. Septiembre 12.1 to 0. When finished.9 to 1.BKP.0. vary the conversion of benzene in the reactor from 0. save as filename: SENS. plot the variation of reactor duty (block REACT) as the recycle split fraction in LFLOW is varied from 0.BKP). All rights reserved.

Cyclohexane Production Workshop C6 H6 + 3 H2 = C 6H12 Benzene Hydrogen Cyclohexane PURGE Total flow = 330 kmol/hr T = 50 C P = 25 bar Molefrac H2 = 0. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 163 ©1998 AspenTech.2 Bottoms rate = 99 kmol/hr Partial Condenser with vapor distillate only Column Pressure = 15 bar Feed stage = 8 BZIN T = 40 C P = 1 bar Benzene flow = 100 kmol/hr LIQ COLFD LFLOW CHRCY 30% flow to stream CHRCY Use the RK-SOAVE property method PRODUCT COLUMN Specify cyclohexane mole recovery of 0. .9999 by varying Bottoms rate from 97 to 101 kmol/hr Septiembre 12.998 T = 50 C Pdrop = 0.02 92% flow to stream H2RCY H2RCY VFLOW H2IN VAP FEED-MIX RXIN T = 150C P = 23 bar REACT HP-SEP RXOUT T = 200 C Pdrop = 1 bar Benzene conv = 0.975 N2 = 0.5 bar LTENDS Theoretical Stages = 12 Reflux ratio = 1. All rights reserved.005 CH4 = 0.

All rights reserved.Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 164 ©1998 AspenTech. .

Chapter 17. Chapter 18. Chapter 21.Reach Your Potential True Design Specifications Objective: Introduce the use of design specifications to meet process design requirements Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. Design Specifications Related Topics: • User Guide. Accessing Flowsheet Variables • User Guide. Convergence Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. 165 . Fortran Blocks and In-Line Fortran • User Guide. All rights reserved. Chapter 19.

Design Specifications • Similar to a feedback controller • Allows user to set the value of a calculated flowsheet quantity to a particular value • Objective is achieved by manipulating a specified input variable • No results associated directly with a design specification • Located under /Data/Flowsheeting Options/Design Specs Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 166 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. .

BKP PRODUCT What should the cooler outlet temperature be to achieve a cumene product purity of 98 mole percent? • • • ® What is the manipulated (varied) variable? » Cooler outlet temperature What is the measured (sampled) variable? » Mole fraction of cumene in stream PRODUCT What is the specification (target) to be achieved? » Mole fraction of cumene in stream PRODUCT = 0. All rights reserved.Design Specification Example RECYCLE REACTOR COOL FEED REAC-OUT COOL-OUT SEP Filename: CUMENE-D.98 Septiembre 12. . 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 167 ©1998 AspenTech.

. The units of the variable used in the objective function are the units for that type of variable as specified by the Units Set declared for the design specification. 2. 3. Specify objective function (Spec) and goal (Target) This is the equation that the specification attempts to satisfy (Design Spec Spec sheet). to be included in the objective function (Design Spec Define sheet). Set tolerance for objective function The specification is said to be converged if the objective function equation is satisfied to within this tolerance (Design Spec Spec sheet). All rights reserved. Identify measured (sampled) variables These are flowsheet quantities. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 168 ©1998 AspenTech.Steps for Using Design Specifications 1. Septiembre 12. usually calculated quantities.

Specify manipulated (varied) variable This is the variable whose value the specification changes in order to satisfy the objective function equation (Design Spec Vary sheet). All rights reserved. 5. The units of the limits for the varied variable are the units for that type of variable as specified by the Units Set declared for the design specification. Septiembre 12.Steps for Using Design Specifications (Continued) 4. Specify range of manipulated (varied) variable These are the lower and upper bounds of the interval within which Aspen Plus will vary the manipulated variable (Design Spec Vary sheet). . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 169 ©1998 AspenTech.

Only quantities that have been input to the flowsheet should be manipulated. All rights reserved. The calculations performed by a design specification are iterative. Providing a good estimate for the manipulated variable will help the design specification converge in fewer iterations. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 170 ©1998 AspenTech. 2. Alternatively. .Notes 1. the final values of the manipulated and/or sampled variables can be viewed directly on the appropriate Stream/Block results forms. 3. and choosing the Results form. by opening the appropriate solver block. The results of a design specification can be found under Data/Convergence/Convergence. This is especially important for large flowsheets with several interrelated design specifications. Septiembre 12.

If a design-spec does not converge: a. Check to see that the manipulated variable is not at its lower or upper bound. perhaps by performing a sensitivity analysis. Try providing a better starting estimate for the value of the manipulated variable. d. b. c. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. Verify that a solution exists within the bounds specified for the manipulated variable. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 171 ©1998 AspenTech. Check to ensure that the manipulated variable does indeed affect the value of the sampled variables.Notes (Continued) 4. .

. algorithm. All rights reserved.Notes (Continued) e. number of iterations. Try changing the characteristics of the convergence block associated with the design-spec (step size. g. Make sure that the objective function does not have a flat region within the range of the manipulated variable. etc. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 172 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12. Try narrowing the bounds of the manipulated variable or loosening the tolerance on the objective function to help convergence.) f.

Design Specification Workshop
Objective: Use a design specification in the cyclohexane flowsheet to fix the heat load on the reactor by varying the recycle flowrate.
The cyclohexane production flowsheet workshop (saved as CYCLOHEX.BKP) is a model of an existing plant. The cooling system around the reactor can handle a maximum operating load of 4.7 MMkcal/hr. Determine the amount of cyclohexane recycle necessary to keep the cooling load on the reactor to this amount. Note: The heat convention used in Aspen Plus is that heat input to a block is positive, and heat removed from a block is negative.

When finished, save as filename: DES-SPEC.BKP
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 173
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Cyclohexane Production Workshop
C6 H6 + 3 H2 = C 6H12 Benzene Hydrogen Cyclohexane
PURGE
Total flow = 330 kmol/hr T = 50 C P = 25 bar Molefrac H2 = 0.975 N2 = 0.005 CH4 = 0.02 92% flow to stream H2RCY

H2RCY

VFLOW

H2IN

VAP FEED-MIX RXIN
T = 150C P = 23 bar

REACT HP-SEP RXOUT
T = 200 C Pdrop = 1 bar Benzene conv = 0.998 T = 50 C Pdrop = 0.5 bar

LTENDS
Theoretical Stages = 12 Reflux ratio = 1.2 Bottoms rate = 99 kmol/hr Partial Condenser with vapor distillate only Column Pressure = 15 bar Feed stage = 8

BZIN
T = 40 C P = 1 bar Benzene flow = 100 kmol/hr

LIQ COLFD LFLOW

CHRCY

30% flow to stream CHRCY

Use the RK-SOAVE property method

PRODUCT COLUMN
Specify cyclohexane mole recovery of 0.9999 by varying Bottoms rate from 97 to 101 kmol/hr

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 174
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 175
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Reach Your

Potential

True

Fortran Blocks
Objective: Introduce usage of Fortran blocks in Aspen Plus

Aspen Plus References: • User Guide, Chapter 19, Fortran Blocks and In-Line Fortran Related Topics: • User Guide, Chapter 20, Sensitivity • User Guide, Chapter 21, Design Specifications • User Guide, Chapter 18, Accessing Flowsheet Variables Introduction to Aspen • User Guide, Chapter 22, Optimization Plus

®

©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

176

Fortran Blocks • Allows user to write Fortran to be executed by Aspen Plus • Simple Fortran can be translated by Aspen Plus and does
not need to be compiled.

• A Fortran compiler must be present on the machine where
the Aspen Plus engine is running to compile more complex Fortran code.

• Results of the execution of a Fortran block must be
viewed by directly examining the values of the variables modified by the Fortran block.

• Located under /Data/Flowsheeting Options/Fortran
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 177
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Fortran Block Example
Use of a Fortran block to set the pressure drop across a Heater block.
RECYCLE REACTOR COOL FEED REAC-OUT COOL-OUT SEP

V

DELTA-P

PRODUCT

Fortran Block DELTA-P = -10-9 * V2

Filename: CUMENE-F.BKP

Pressure drop across heater is proportional to square of volumetric flow into heater.
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 178
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Fortran Block Example (Continued) • Which flowsheet variables must be accessed?
» Volumetric flow of stream REAC-OUT
This can be accessed in two different ways: 1. Mass flow and mass density of stream REAC-OUT 2. A prop-set containing volumetric flow of a mixture

» Pressure drop across block COOL

• When should the Fortran block be executed?
» Before block COOL

• Which variables are read and which are written?
» Volumetric flow is read » Pressure drop is written
Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 179
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Uses of Fortran Blocks • Feed-forward control (setting flowsheet inputs based on
upstream calculated values)

• Calling external subroutines • Input / output to and from external files • Writing to Control Panel, History File, or Report File • Custom reports

Septiembre 12, 2001
®

Introduction to Aspen Plus

Slide 180
©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

except assigned GOTO WRITE statements that do not have unformatted text in them FORMAT statements CONTINUE statements DO loops Calls to some built-in Fortran functions REAL or INTEGER statements* DOUBLE PRECISION statements* DIMENSION statements* * Enter on the Declaration sheet. The following Fortran can be interpreted: Arithmetic expressions and assignment statements IF statements GOTO statements. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 181 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Fortran Interpreter • • Aspen Plus will interpret in-line Fortran if it is possible. Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 182 ©1998 AspenTech. But.Built-In Fortran Functions • Calls to some built-in Fortran functions: DABS DACOS DASIN DATAN DATAN2 DCOS DCOSH DCOTAN DERF DEXP DFLOAT DGAMMA DLGAMA DLOG DLOG10 DMAX1 DMIN1 DMOD DSIN DSINH DSQRT DTAN DTANH IABS IDINT MAX0 MIN0 MOD • You can also use the equivalent single precision or generic function names. . Septiembre 12. Aspen Plus always performs double precision calculations.

Statements Requiring Compilation • The following statements require compilation: CALL CHARACTER COMMON COMPLEX DATA ENTRY EQUIVALENCE IMPLICIT LOGICAL PARAMETER PRINT RETURN READ STOP SUBROUTINE Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 183 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.

. Specify location of Fortran block in execution sequence (Fortran Input Sequence sheet) . Access flowsheet variables to be used within Fortran . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 184 ©1998 AspenTech. 3. EQUIVALENCE.All flowsheet quantities that must be either read from or written to.Includes both non-executable (COMMON.Specify with read and write variables Septiembre 12. Write Fortran . etc) Fortran (Fortran Input Declarations sheet) and executable Fortran (Fortran Input Fortran sheet) to achieve desired result. or . All rights reserved. 2.Steps for Using Fortran Blocks 1. must be identified (Fortran Input Define sheet).Specify directly.

b. Septiembre 12. 3. . Column two must be blank. Variable names should not begin with lZ or ZZ. The Fortran code must begin in column 7 or beyond. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 185 ©1998 AspenTech. ” in the first column.Notes 1. The rules for writing In-Line Fortran are as follows: a. Comment lines must have the letter “C” or a “ . c. Only quantities that have been input to the flowsheet should be overwritten. 2.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 186 ©1998 AspenTech.*) flow OR write(NTERM. When using the Fortran WRITE statement. the preferred way to specify where the Fortran block should be executed is to list the read and write variables. 5. For example.10) flow 10 format(‘Feed flowrate =‘.G12. write(NTERM. . you can use the predefined unit number NTERM to write to the control panel.5) Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. On the Fortran Input Sequence sheet.Notes (Continued) 4.

Fortran Workshop Objective: Use a Fortran Block to maintain the methane:water ratio in the feed to a reactor. Note: The methane:water ratio in the feed must be maintained constant for each Sensitivity case. Create a flowsheet as shown in the diagram on the following slide.5%. Set up a Sensitivity block and plot a graph showing the variation of reactor duty as the methane flowrate in the feed is varied from 100 to 500 lbmol/hr. (Hint: This can be achieved using a Fortran Block. . In a methane reformer. generating carbon monoxide as a by-product. and the molar ratio of methane to water in the feed is 1:4. All rights reserved.) Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 187 ©1998 AspenTech. The conversion of methane is 99. hydrogen gas is produced by reacting methane with water. The reaction taking place is the following: The feed to the reformer consists of pure methane and water streams. These are mixed and heated prior to being fed to the reformer.

. All rights reserved.Fortran Workshop (Continued) CH4 + H2O = 3 H2 + CO Methane Water Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Temperature = 150 F Pressure = 900 psia CH4 MIX RXIN REFORMER Temperature = 70 F Pressure = 15 psia H2O Temperature = 1100 F Pressure = 850 psia RXOUT Temperature = 1450 F Pressure Drop = 20 psi CH4 conversion = 0. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 188 ©1998 AspenTech.BKP Septiembre 12.995 Use the Peng-Robinson Property Method When finished. save as filename: Fortran.

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 189 ©1998 AspenTech. .Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved. Chapter 38. Chapter 37. .Reach Your Potential True Windows Interoperability Objective: Introduce the use of windows interoperability to transfer data easily to and from other Windows programs. Using the Aspen Plus ActiveX Automation Server Introduction to Aspen Plus 190 ® ©1998 AspenTech. Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. Working with Other Windows Programs • User Guide.

Windows Interoperability • • • • • Copying and pasting simulation data into spreadsheets or reports Copying and pasting flowsheet graphics and plots into reports Creating active links between Aspen Plus and other Windows applications OLE embedding ActiveX automation Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 191 ©1998 AspenTech. .

Slide making program for presentations Copy tabular data from spreadsheets into Aspen Plus for Data Regression.Word processor for reports . 2001 . etc.Spreadsheet for further analysis .Design program .Database for case storage and management • • • ® Copy flowsheet graphics and plots into .Examples • Copy simulation results such as column profiles and stream results into .Windows Interoperability . Copy plots or tables into the Process Flowsheet Window.Word processor for reports and documentation . Data-Fit. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 192 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 193 ©1998 AspenTech.The benefits to the engineer are quick and error-free data transfer and consistent engineering results throughout the engineering work process. . .Benefits of Windows Interoperability • Benefits of Copy/Paste/Paste Link . Septiembre 12.Live data links can be established that update these applications as the process model is changed to automatically propagate results of engineering changes.

Columns of data can be selected by clicking the column heading. 3.Multiple fields of data or objects can be selected by holding down the CTRL key while clicking the mouse on the fields. . or an entire grid can be selected by clicking on the top left cell. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 194 ©1998 AspenTech. Select Select the data fields or the graphical objects.Steps for Using Copy and Paste 1. Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. Paste Click the mouse in the input field where you want the information and choose Paste from the Edit menu or click CTRL-V. 2. . . Copy Choose Copy from the Edit menu or type CTRL-C.

Septiembre 12.Aspen Plus as the OLE container: Other windows applications can be embedded within the Aspen Plus simulation. The simulation model is actually contained in the document. .Applications can be used within applications. 2001 ® . Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 195 ©1998 AspenTech.OLE Embedding • • What is OLE embedding? .Aspen Plus as the OLE server: Aspen Plus flowsheet graphics can be embedded into a report document. and could be delivered directly with that document. Uses of OLE embedding . All rights reserved. or stream data into a CAD drawing.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 196 ©1998 AspenTech.OLE container: For example. All rights reserved.OLE server: If the recipient of an engineering report. Excel spreadsheets and plots could be used to enhance Aspen Plus flowsheet graphics. . Septiembre 12. . for example. he could access and run the embedded Aspen Plus model directly from the report document. wanted to review the model assumptions.OLE Embedding (Continued) • Examples of OLE embedding .

Using Copy and Paste . .Embedding Objects in the Flowsheet • • • • You can embed other applications as objects into the Process Flowsheet window. Septiembre 12. resize or attach the object to a block or stream in the flowsheet. You can also move. All rights reserved.Using the Insert dialog box You can edit the object embedded in the flowsheet by double clicking on the object to edit it inside Aspen Plus. You can do this in two ways: . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 197 ©1998 AspenTech.

Copy and Paste Workshop 1 Objective: Use copy and paste to copy and paste the stage temperatures into a spreadsheet. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 198 ©1998 AspenTech. • Use the Cyclohexane flowsheet workshop (saved as CYCLOHEX.xls Septiembre 12.BKP) • Copy the temperature profile from COLUMN into a spreadsheet. All rights reserved. • Generate a plot of the temperature using the plot wizard and copy and paste the plot into the spreadsheet. • Save the spreadsheet as CYCLOHEX-result. .

• Use the Cyclohexane flowsheet workshop (saved as CYCLOHEX.BKP) • Copy the stream results from stream RXIN into the input form. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 199 ©1998 AspenTech. the temperature and the pressure separately. Note: Reinitialize before running the simulation in order to see how many iterations are needed before and after the estimate is added.Copy and Paste Workshop 2 Objective: Use copy and paste to copy the stream results to a stream input form. . Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.Copy the compositions. .

Creating Active Links • • When copying and pasting information. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 200 ©1998 AspenTech. The links update these applications as the process model is modified to automatically propagate results of engineering changes. you can create active links between input or results fields in Aspen Plus and other applications such as Word and Excel.

All rights reserved. In the Paste Special dialog box. In the location where you want to paste the link. click the Paste Link radio button. 3. . 5. 2. 4. Open both applications. Septiembre 12. choose Paste Special from the Edit menu. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 201 ©1998 AspenTech.Steps for Creating Active Links 1. Select the data (or object) that you want to paste and link. Choose Copy from the Edit menu.

2001 . Septiembre 12. Notice the changes. Copy and paste a link with the flow and composition of cumene in the product stream into the spreadsheet.Paste Link Demonstration Objective: Create an active link from Aspen Plus Results into a spreadsheet. All rights reserved. Change the temperature in the spreadsheet and then rerun the flowsheet. • • • • • ® Start with the cumene flowsheet demonstration. Open a spreadsheet and create a cell with the temperature for the cooler in it. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 202 ©1998 AspenTech. Copy and paste the link into the Aspen Plus flowsheet.

xls spreadsheet as a link.BKP) Copy the Condenser and Reboiler duty results from the RadFrac COLUMN Summary sheet. Change the Reflux ratio in the column to 2 and rerun the flowsheet. Septiembre 12. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 203 ©1998 AspenTech. Use Paste Special and choose Link. All rights reserved. ® .Paste Link Workshop Objective: Create an active link from Aspen Plus results into a spreadsheet • • • • Use the Cyclohexane flowsheet workshop (saved as CYCLOHEX. Use Copy with Format and copy the value. the label and the units. Paste the results into the CYCLOHEX-results. Check the spreadsheet to see that the results have changed there also. Notice that the temperature profile results have not changed since they were not pasted as a link.

Save the first application again. . . Septiembre 12.Save the first application with a new name. you must save the link container after saving the link source. All rights reserved. you must do three Save operations: .Saving Files with Active Links • • • Be sure to save both the link source file and the link container file. 2001 ® . If you have active links in both directions between the two applications and you change the name of both files. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 204 ©1998 AspenTech.Save the second application with a new name. If you save the link source with a different name.

. (Note: The Process Flowsheet must be the active window.) Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 205 ©1998 AspenTech. Links is not an option on the Edit menu if the Data Browser is active. there is nothing special that you need to do. All rights reserved.In the Links dialog box.Select Links. You can select Yes or No. from the Edit menu in Aspen Plus. 2001 ® . Septiembre 12.Running Files with Active Links • • • When you open the link source file. select the source file and click Open Source. To make a link source application visible: . When you open the link container file. you will usually see a dialog box asking you if you want to re-establish the links.

All rights reserved.Custom applications can be built on top of process models. .Other programs such as Visual Basic or C++ can be used to control a simulation.ActiveX Automation • What is ActiveX automation? . Uses of ActiveX automation . . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 206 ©1998 AspenTech. • Septiembre 12.Visual Basic or C++ can be written to access and control process models using a documented interface syntax.

OLE Automation (Continued) • Benefits of ActiveX automation . . All rights reserved.A model developer in the Process Engineering department could develop a customized Excel interface to an Aspen Plus model for plant operators. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 207 ©1998 AspenTech.A customer might write a top-level C++ program that • pulls data from a process model • uses that data to automatically generate custom spec sheets • populates a process engineering database • launches a third-party design program Septiembre 12. using the Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) macro language. .

All rights reserved.More elaborate Visual Basic code is used to create a general heat exchanger spreadsheet that can access the heat exchangers in any Aspen Plus flowsheet.Simple run and reinit button are used in the butanol flowsheet.bkp • Septiembre 12.Files: butanol-demo.OLE Automation Demonstration • Demonstration 1 . .Files: olespecsheet. .bkp Demonstration 2 .xls and butanol. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 208 ©1998 AspenTech.xls and heatx2. .

changes a simulation parameter and re-runs the simulation ListBlocks . All rights reserved.retrieves values for a non-scalar variable with three identifiers UnitChange .retrieves values for a non-scalar variable with two identifiers ReacCoeff .Visual Basic Examples » Located in the APUI100\VBExample directory • • • • • • • • • • • • ® Open .retrieves values for a non-scalar variable with one identifier CompProf .retrieves the units of measurement symbol for a variable Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 209 ©1998 AspenTech.retrieves a list of blocks and their attributes Connectivity .shows changing the units of measurement of a variable UnitConversion . 2001 . Septiembre 12.retrieves a value both in the display units (psi) and alternative units (atm) UnitString .displays a table showing flowsheet connectivity GetCollection .retrieves scalar variables from a block TempProf .illustrates use of a collection object GetScalarValues .open existing simulation Run .

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 210 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Septiembre 12.

Heat Exchangers Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. 211 . Chapter 3. Aspen Plus References: • Unit Operation Models Reference Manual.Reach Your Potential True Heat Exchangers Objective: Introduce the unit operation models used for heat exchangers and heaters. All rights reserved.

Interface to B-JAC Aerotran block Septiembre 12.Heater or cooler HeatX .Heat Exchanger Blocks • • • • • Heater . All rights reserved.Multi-stream heat exchanger Hetran .Interface to B-JAC Hetran block Aerotran . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 212 ©1998 AspenTech. .Two stream heat exchanger MHeatX .

Working with the Heater Model The Heater block mixes multiple inlet streams to produce a single outlet stream at a specified thermodynamic state. Septiembre 12.Heaters .Compressors (when work-related results are not needed) Heater can also be used to set the thermodynamic conditions of a stream. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 213 ©1998 AspenTech. . Heater can be used to represent: .Pumps (when work-related results are not needed) .Valves .Coolers . All rights reserved.

2001 ® .Vapor fraction Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 214 ©1998 AspenTech.Outlet temperature .Heat Duty .Heater Input Specifications Allowed combinations: • Pressure (or Pressure drop) and one of: .Degrees of subcooling or superheating Outlet Temperature or Temperature change and one of: . All rights reserved.Pressure .Temperature change .Heat duty or inlet heat stream . • Septiembre 12.Vapor fraction .

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 215 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Temperature change Vapor fraction of 1 means dew point condition.Outlet temperature . .Heater Input Specifications (Continued) For single phase use Pressure (drop) and one of: . 0 means bubble point Septiembre 12.Heat duty or inlet heat stream .

If you give two specifications. All rights reserved. Heater uses the sum of the inlet heat streams as a duty specification. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 216 ©1998 AspenTech. The net heat load is the sum of the inlet heat streams minus the actual (calculated) heat duty. One outlet heat stream can be specified for the net heat load from a Heater. 2001 . Heater uses the heat streams only to calculate the net heat duty.Heat Streams • • • • • ® Any number of inlet heat streams can be specified for a Heater. If you give only one specification (temperature or pressure). Septiembre 12.

Septiembre 12.Working with the HeatX Model • • • HeatX can perform simplified or rigorous rating calculations. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 217 ©1998 AspenTech. For rigorous heat transfer and pressure drop calculations. the heat exchanger geometry must be specified. . Simplified rating calculations (heat and material balance calculations) can be performed if exchanger geometry is unknown or unimportant.

Working with the HeatX Model (Continued) HeatX can model shell-and-tube exchanger types: . All rights reserved. J and X shells .Bare and low-finned tubes HeatX performs: .Segmental baffle TEMA E. G. F. H.Rod baffle TEMA E and F shells . condensation film coefficient calculations .Full zone analysis . .Built-in or user specified correlations Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 218 ©1998 AspenTech.Counter-current and co-current .Sensible heat.Heat transfer and pressure drop calculations . nucleate boiling.

Working with the HeatX Model (Continued) HeatX cannot: • • • Perform design calculations Perform mechanical vibration analysis Estimate fouling factors Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 219 ©1998 AspenTech. .

Degrees of superheating / subcooling .Vapor fraction Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 220 ©1998 AspenTech.Temperature . All rights reserved.Temperature change .HeatX Input Specifications Select one of the following specifications: • • • Heat transfer area or Geometry Exchanger duty For hot or cold outlet stream: .Temperature approach . Septiembre 12. 2001 ® .

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 221 ©1998 AspenTech. Two-stream heat exchangers can also be modeled using MHeatX.Working with the MHeatX Model • • • • MHeatX can be used to represent heat transfer between multiple hot and cold streams. Septiembre 12. MHeatX uses multiple Heater blocks and heat streams to enhance flowsheet convergence. . Detailed. rigorous internal zone analysis can be performed to determine pinch points. All rights reserved.

Fortran block or design spec) or an MHeatX to avoid flowsheet complexity created by HeatX. the utility) is not important. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 222 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.HeatX versus Heater Consider the following: • • • Use HeatX when both sides are important. . Septiembre 12. Use two Heaters (coupled by heat stream. Use Heater when one side (e.g.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 223 ©1998 AspenTech.Two Heaters versus One HeatX Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. .

The Aerotran block is the interface to the B-JAC Aerotran program for designing and simulating aircooled heat exchangers. All rights reserved.Working with Hetran and Aerotran • • • The Hetran block is the interface to the B-JAC Hetran program for designing and simulating shell and tube heat exchangers. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 224 ©1998 AspenTech. Information related to the heat exchanger configuration and geometry is entered through the Hetran or Aerotran standalone program interface. Septiembre 12. .

. These tables can be printed. or exported for use with other heat exchanger design software. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 225 ©1998 AspenTech. plotted. Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. Tables can be generated for various independent variables (typically duty or temperature) for any property that Aspen Plus can generate.Heat Curves All of the heat exchanger models are able to calculate Heat Curves (Hcurves).

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 226 ©1998 AspenTech. .Heat Curves Tabular Results Septiembre 12.

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 227 ©1998 AspenTech.Heat Curve Plot Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved.Flowrate: 10000 kg/hr . a rigorous HeatX and two Heaters connected with a Heat stream. 20% ethylbenzene and 10% water Cooling water .Composition: 100% water Septiembre 12. • ® .Pressure: 10 bar .Flow rate: 60000 kg/hr .HeatX Workshop Objective: Compare the simulation of a heat exchanger that uses water to cool a hydrocarbon mixture using three methods: a shortcut HeatX. • Hydrocarbon stream .Pressure: 4 bar .Composition: 50 wt% benzene. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 228 ©1998 AspenTech.Temperature: 200 C . 20% styrene.Temperature: 20 C .

Septiembre 12. . Specify that the Steam Tables are used to calculate the properties for the cooling water streams on the Block BlockOptions Properties sheet. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 229 ©1998 AspenTech. save as filename: HEATX.HeatX Workshop (Continued) When finished. Specify that the valid phases for the hydrocarbon stream is Vapor-Liquid-Liquid.BKP HEATER-1 HCLD-IN HCLD-OUT SHOT-OUT RHOT-OUT SHEATX SCLD-IN Q-TRANS SCLD-OUT RCLD-IN RHEATX RCLD-OUT HEATER-2 HHOT-IN HHOT-OUT SHOT-IN RHOT-IN Use the NRTL-RK Property Method for the hydrocarbon streams. Start with the General with Metric Units Template.

1 tube pass . .HeatX Workshop (Continued) • Shortcut HeatX simulation: .Create heat curves containing all info required for thermal design. Septiembre 12. 21 mm ID. 25 mm OD . . All rights reserved.Shell diameter 1 m.Hydrocarbons in shell leave with a vapor fraction of 0 . pitch 31 mm.Change the heat exchanger specification to Geometry and re-run.Use the same specifications as the shortcut HeatX simulation Rigorous HeatX simulation: .5 baffles.Hydrocarbon stream exit has a vapor fraction of 0 .All nozzles 100 mm .No pressure drop in either stream Two Heaters simulation: . 15% cut . 3 m length.300 bare tubes. 2001 ® • • Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 230 ©1998 AspenTech.

.Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 231 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

Aspen Plus References: • Unit Operation Models Reference Manual. All rights reserved. Pressure Changers Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. 232 .Reach Your Potential True Pressure Changers Objective: Introduce the unit operation models used to change pressure: pumps. and models for calculating pressure change through pipes and valves. compressors. Chapter 6.

Multi-stage compressor or turbine Valve .Pressure Changer Blocks • • • • • • Pump .Multi-segment pipe Septiembre 12.Single-segment pipe Pipeline .Control valve Pipe .Pump or hydraulic turbine Compr . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 233 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.Compressor or turbine MCompr .

• • • • Septiembre 12. A Heater model can be used for pressure change calculations only.Hydraulic turbines Power requirement is calculated or input.Pumps . 2001 ® . Vapor-liquid or vapor-liquid-liquid calculations can be specified to check outlet stream phases. All rights reserved. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 234 ©1998 AspenTech.Working with the Pump Model • The Pump block can be used to simulate: . Pump is designed to handle a single liquid phase.

Dimensional curves • Head versus flow • Power versus flow .Dimensionless curves: • Head coefficient versus flow coefficient Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 235 ©1998 AspenTech.Pump Performance Curves • • Rating can be done by specifying scalar parameters or a pump performance curve. Specify: . All rights reserved.

2001 . All rights reserved.Polytropic positive displacement compressor .Isentropic turbine MCompr is used for multi-stage compressors. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 236 ©1998 AspenTech. Compr is designed to handle both single and multiple phase calculations. • • • • ® Septiembre 12.Working with the Compr Model • The Compr block can be used to simulate: .Isentropic compressor .Polytropic centrifugal compressor . A Heater model can be used for pressure change calculations only. Power requirement is calculated or input.

All rights reserved. • Septiembre 12.Multi-stage polytropic positive displacement compressor .Working with the MCompr Model • The MCompr block can be used to simulate: . or three. . except the cooler after the last stage.Each cooler can have a liquid knockout stream. two-.Multi-stage isentropic compressor .phase flash calculations in the intercoolers. .Intercooler specifications apply to all subsequent coolers. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 237 ©1998 AspenTech. 2001 ® .Multi-stage isentropic turbine MCompr can have an intercooler between each stage. and an aftercooler after the last stage. .Multi-stage polytropic centrifugal compressor .You can perform one-.

Dimensionless curves: • • Head coefficient versus flow coefficient Compr cannot handle performance curves for a turbine. .Compressor Performance Curves • • Rating can be done by specifying a compressor performance curve. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 238 ©1998 AspenTech. Specify: .Dimensional curves • Head versus flow • Power versus flow . All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.

The net work load is the sum of the inlet work streams minus the actual (calculated) work. Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.Work Streams • • • Any number of inlet work streams can be specified for pumps and compressors. One outlet work stream can be specified for the net work load from pumps or compressors. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 239 ©1998 AspenTech. .

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 240 ©1998 AspenTech. Flow is assumed to be adiabatic. Valve can perform single or multiple phase calculations.Control valves . All rights reserved.Working with the Valve Model • • • • The Valve block can be used to simulate: .Pressure drop The pressure drop across a valve is related to the valve flow coefficient. . Septiembre 12.

Adiabatic flash for specified outlet pressure (pressure changer) .Calculate valve flow coefficient for specified outlet pressure (design) .Calculate outlet pressure for specified valve (rating) Valve can check for choked flow.Working with the Valve Model (Continued) • • The effect of head loss from pipe fittings can be included. • • Septiembre 12. Cavitation index can be calculated. All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 241 ©1998 AspenTech. There are three types of calculations: .

Septiembre 12.Working with the Pipe Model • • • • • • ® The Pipe block calculates the pressure drop and heat transfer in a single pipe segment. Entrance effects are not modeled. Pipe calculates the inlet pressure and updates the state variables of the inlet stream. The Pipeline block can be used for a multiple-segment pipe. If the inlet pressure is known. If the outlet pressure is known. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 242 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. Pipe calculates the outlet pressure. Pipe can perform single or multiple phase calculations. 2001 .

. COMPR RECYCLE VALVE RECYCLE2 RECYCLE3 Outlet Pressure = 3 psig Polytropic compressor model using GPSA method Discharge pressure = 5 psig FEED REAC-OUT REACTOR COOL COOL-OUT SEP PRODUCT Filename: CUMENE-P.Pressure Changers Block Example Add a Compressor and a Valve to the cumene flowsheet.BKP Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 243 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 244 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.Pressure Changers Workshop Objective: Add pressure changer unit operations to the Cyclohexane flowsheet. • Start with the Cyclohexane Workshop flowsheet (CYCLOHEX.BKP) Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved.6 Driver efficiency = 0.BKP Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 245 ©1998 AspenTech.Pressure Changers Workshop (Continued) Isentropic 4 bar pressure change COMP H2RCY VALVE PURGE VFLOW PURGE2 H2IN H2RCY2 FEED-MIX REACT VAP 20 bar outlet pressure Globe valve V810 equal percent flow 1. save as filename: PRESCHNG.5-in size FEEDPUMP BZIN BZIN2 CHRCY3 RXIN RXOUT HP-SEP LTENDS LIQ PIPE CHRCY2 CHRCY COLFD LFLOW PRODUCT COLUMN PUMP Pump efficiency = 0. 2001 ® Carbon Steel Schedule 40 1-in diameter 25-m length 26 bar outlet pressure When finished. .9 Performance Curve Head Flow [m] [cum/hr] 40 20 250 10 300 5 400 3 Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 246 ©1998 AspenTech.Septiembre 12. .

tear streams and flowsheet sequences Aspen Plus References: • User Guide.Reach Your Potential True Flowsheet Convergence Objective: Introduce the idea of convergence blocks. 247 . Convergence Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. Chapter 17. All rights reserved.

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 248 ©1998 AspenTech. • Convergence blocks determine how guesses for a tear stream or design specification manipulated variable are updated from iteration to iteration.” • To determine the convergence blocks defined by Aspen Plus. . /Data/Convergence/Convergence.User defined convergence block names must not begin with the character “$.” .Convergence Blocks • Every design specification and tear stream has an associated convergence block. look under the “Flowsheet Analysis” section in the Control Panel messages.. • User convergence blocks can be specified under Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. • Aspen Plus-defined convergence block names begin with the character “$.

Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.Convergence Block Types • Different types of convergence blocks are used for different purposes: To converge tear streams: • ® • WEGSTEIN • DIRECT • BROYDEN • NEWTON To converge design specifications: • SECANT • BROYDEN • NEWTON To converge design specifications and tear streams: • BROYDEN • NEWTON For optimization: • SQP • COMPLEX Global convergence options can be specified on the Convergence ConvOptions Defaults form. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 249 ©1998 AspenTech. .

or on the left-hand pane of the Control Panel window. All rights reserved.Flowsheet Sequence • To determine the flowsheet sequence calculated by Aspen Plus. • User-specified sequences can be either full or partial. . • User-determined sequences can be specified on the Convergence Sequence form. Septiembre 12. look under the “COMPUTATION ORDER FOR THE FLOWSHEET” section in the Control Panel. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 250 ©1998 AspenTech.

• Tear streams are related to. . and iteratively updates the guess until two consecutive guesses are within a specified tolerance. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 251 ©1998 AspenTech. but not the same as recycle streams.Tear Streams • Which are the recycle streams? • Which are the possible tear streams? S7 B1 MIXER S1 S2 B2 MIXER S3 B3 FSPLIT S4 B4 FSPLIT S5 S6 • A tear stream is one for which Aspen Plus makes an initial guess.

” Aspen Plus will automatically try to choose that stream to be a tear stream. • Providing estimates for tear streams can facilitate or speed up flowsheet convergence (highly recommended. All rights reserved.Tear Streams (Continued) • To determine the tear streams chosen by Aspen Plus. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 252 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12. . otherwise the default is zero). look under the “Flowsheet Analysis” section in the Control Panel. • User-determined tear streams can be specified on the Convergence Tear form. • If you enter information for a stream that is in a “loop.

.Mole. mass. or standard liquid volume basis can be selected. Select a stream on the flowsheet.Component flows. .Reconciling Streams • • Simulation results for a stream can be copied onto the its input form. 2001 ® . or component fractions and total flow can be copied. click the right mouse button and select “Reconcile” from the list to copy stream results to the input form. . Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 253 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Two state variables must be selected for the stream flash calculation. Septiembre 12.

100 lbmol/hr T=165 F P=15 psia FEED XH20 = 0. All rights reserved.3 XEthanol = 0.BKP. Start with the file CONVERGE.3 T=70 F P=35 psia 50 lbmol/hr Ethylene Glycol GLYCOL DIST COLUMN PREHEATR BOT-COOL Area = 65 sqft FEED-HT VAPOR PREFLASH DP=0 Q=0 LIQ BOT Theoretical Stages = 10 Reflux Ratio = 5 Distillate to Feed Ratio = 0. save as filename: CONV-R.Convergence Workshop Objective: Converge this flowsheet.4 XMethanol = 0. Septiembre 12.BKP Slide 254 ©1998 AspenTech.2 Column Pressure = 1 atm Feed Stage = 5 Total Condenser Use NRTL-RK Property Method When finished. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus .

Why do some of the blocks show zero flow? . which do you know the most about? (Note: If you enter information for a stream that is in a “loop.Which stream does Aspen Plus choose as a tear stream? .What are other possible tear streams? Recommendation: Give initial estimates for a tear stream. All rights reserved. . .” Aspen Plus will automatically choose that stream to be a tear stream and set up a convergence block for it.What is the Aspen Plus-generated execution sequence for the flowsheet? .) Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 255 ©1998 AspenTech.What messages are displayed in the control panel? .Convergence Workshop (Continued) Hints for Convergence Workshop: Questions to ask yourself: .Of the three possible tear streams you could choose.

and what is its value at the end of the run? . Broyden. Septiembre 12. Note: You can either manually create a convergence block to converge the tear stream of your choice. All rights reserved. .g.What else can be tried to improve this convergence? Recommendation: Try a different convergence algorithm (e. Direct.How is the err/tol value behaving.Convergence Workshop (Continued) Questions to ask yourself: .If not. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 256 ©1998 AspenTech. or Newton). why not? (see control panel) .Does the flowsheet converge after entering initial estimates for the tear stream? . or you can change the default convergence method for all tear streams on the Convergence Conv Options Defaults Default Methods sheet.Does it appear that increasing the number of convergence iterations will help? .

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 257 ©1998 AspenTech.Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.

258 .Reach Your Potential True Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop Objective: Practice and apply many of the techniques used in this course and learn how to best approach modeling projects Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved.Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop Objective: Model a methanol plant. at a purity of at least 99. The aim is to achieve the methanol production rate of approximately 62. Septiembre 12. Carbon Dioxide (assumed to be taken from a nearby Ammonia Plant) and Water. The process being modeled is a methanol plant. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 259 ©1998 AspenTech. Start building the flowsheet and think about how you would work to complete the project. The basic feed streams to the plant are Natural Gas. This is a large flowsheet that would take an experienced engineer more than an afternoon to complete.000 kg/hr.95 % wt. .

Use an appropriate equation of state for the portions of the flowsheet involving gases and use an activity coefficient model for the sections where non-ideal liquids may be present.Check for two liquid phases. . . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 260 ©1998 AspenTech.Check if binary parameters are available.Use Analysis. • Investigate the physical properties. . All rights reserved.General Guidelines • Build the flowsheet one section at a time. . Complexity can always be added later. Septiembre 12. . • Simplify whenever possible.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 261 ©1998 AspenTech.Full-Scale Plant Modeling Workshop Air Fuel FURNACE MEOHRXR SYNCOMP COOL4 FL3 COOL2 COOL3 MKUPST M2 FEEDHTR COOL1 FL2 SPLIT1 E121 MIX2 CIRC E122 FL4 E223 E124 SPLIT2 BOILER FL1 H2OCIRC CO2 CO2COMP M1 REFORMER SATURATE FL5 NATGAS CH4COMP REFINING TOPPING M4 MKWATER Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. .

.Part 1: Front-End Section From Furnace MKUPST M2 FEEDHTR To BOILER H2OCIRC CO2COMP CO2 M1 SATURATE REFORMER NATGAS CH4COMP Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 262 ©1998 AspenTech.

Part 1: Front-End Section (Continued) 1.0.N2 .CO2 .CO2 .0059 .0019 .0. 2001 ® Circulation Water .N2 .CH4 .0.0. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 263 ©1998 AspenTech.0. .CH4 .7 bar • Flow = 29952 kg/hr • Mole Fraction .H2O .0391 .0.H2OCIRC • Pure water stream • Flow = 410000 kg/hr • Temperature = 195 C • Pressure = 26 bar Makeup Steam .C3H8 .0.0094 .0028 Natural Gas Stream . All rights reserved.NATGAS • Temperature = 26 C • Pressure = 21.0008 .0.0003 Septiembre 12.0.9253 .C2H6 .H2 . Front-end Section Carbon Dioxide Stream – CO2 • Temperature = 43 C • Pressure = 1.MKUPST • Stream of pure steam • Flow = 40000 kg/hr • Pressure = 26 bar • Vapor Fraction = 1 • Adjust the makeup steam flow to achieve a desired steam to methane molar ratio of 2.4 bar • Flow = 24823 kg/hr • Mole Fraction .9539 .8 in the Reformer feed REFFEED.0606 .0.

Part 1: Front-End Section (Continued) Carbon Dioxide Compressor . • Estimated HETP = 10 x 1. All rights reserved. .5 inches = 381 mm • Height of Packing = 15 meters • No condenser and no reboiler.CH4COMP • Discharge Pressure = 27.FEEDHTR • Exit Temperature = 560 C • Pressure drop = 0 Saturation Column . Reformer Reactor .5 inch metal pall ring packing.5 bar • Compressor Type = single stage Reformer Process Side Feed Stream Pre-Heater .SATURATE • 1. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 264 ©1998 AspenTech.5 bar • Compressor Type = 2 stage Natural Gas Compressor .REFORMER • Consists of two parts: the Furnace portion and the Steam Reforming portion • Exit Temperature of the Steam Reforming portion = 860 C • Pressure = 18 bar Septiembre 12.CO2COMP • Discharge Pressure = 27.

77068 2989.18E-08 1.6541 139696.000686384 258.74097E-07 Septiembre 12.513276 3.9538 -213.25863 0.964 53937. .335833 4882.08402321 0 2.06E-10 2.68394 751.933793 1381. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 265 ©1998 AspenTech.80E-15 0.Part 1: Front-End Section Check Temperature C Pressure bar Vapor Frac Mole Flow kmol/hr Mass Flow kg/hr Volume Flow cum/hr Enthalpy MMkcal/hr Mole Flow kmol/hr CO CO2 H2 WATER METHANOL METHANE NITROGEN BUTANOL DME (DIMETHYLETHER) ACETONE OXYGEN ETHANE PROPANE Reformer Product 860 18 1 10266. All rights reserved.007007476 6.

. All rights reserved.Part 2: Heat Recovery Section SYNCOMP COOL4 FL3 To Methanol Loop COOL2 COOL3 FL2 COOL1 From Reformer BOILER FL1 To REFINING To TOPPING Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 266 ©1998 AspenTech.

FL1 • Pressure Drop = 0 bar • Heat Duty = 0 MMkcal/hr FL2 • Exit Pressure = 17. Heat Recovery Section • This section consists of a series of heat exchangers and flash vessels used to recover the available energy and water in the Reformed Gas stream.Part 2: Heat Recovery Section (Continued) 2.1 bar COOL4 • Exit temperature = 40 C • Exit Pressure = 17.6 bar Septiembre 12.5 bar • Intercooler Exit Temperature = 40 C BOILER • Exit temperature = 166 C • Exit Pressure= 18 bar COOL1 • Exit temperature = 136 C • Exit Pressure = 18 bar COOL2 • Exit temperature = 104 C • Exit Pressure = 17. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 267 ©1998 AspenTech. .7 bar • Heat Duty = 0 MMkcal/hr FL3 • Exit Pressure = 17. All rights reserved.9 bar COOL3 • Exit temperature = 85 C • Pressure Drop = 0.4 bar • Heat Duty = 0 MMkcal/hr SYNCOM • Two Stage Polytropic compressor • Discharge Pressure = 82.

0 82. All rights reserved.Part 2: Heat Recovery Section Check Temperature C Pressure bar Vapor Frac Mole Flow kmol/hr To Methanol Loop 40. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 268 ©1998 AspenTech. .997465769 7302.50 0.28917 Septiembre 12.

Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section MEOHRXR To Furnace SPLIT1 From SYNCOMP E121 SPLIT2 MIX2 CIRC E122 FL4 E223 E124 To FL5 Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 269 ©1998 AspenTech.

45 C • Exit Pressure .6 bar Septiembre 12. .150 C • Exit Pressure .81 bar E122 • Cold Side Exit Temperature .3kmol/hr) FL4 • Exit Pressure = 75.6 bar • Heat Duty = 0 MMkcal/hr CIRC • Single stage compressor • Discharge Pressure = 83 bar • Discharge Temperature = 55 C SPLIT1 • Split Fraction = 0.77.2kmol/hr) (Molar extent 0.8kmol/hr) (Molar extent 0.Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section (Continued) 3.3 bar E124 • Exit Temperature .120 C E223 • Exit Temperature . All rights reserved.8 to stream to E121 SPLIT2 • Stream PURGE = 9000 kg/hr • Stream RECYCLE = 326800 kg/hr Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 270 ©1998 AspenTech. Methanol Synthesis Loop Section Methanol Reactor .60 C • Exit Pressure .MEOHRXR • Tube cooled reactor • Exit Temperature from the tubes = 240 C • No pressure drop across the reactor • Reactions − CO + H2O <-> CO2 + H2 − CO2 + 3H2 <-> CH3OH + H2O − 2CH3OH <-> DIMETHYLETHER + H2O − 4CO + 8H2 <-> N-BUTANOL + 3H2O − 3CO + 5H2 <-> ACETONE + 2H2O E121 • Exit Temperature .75. 2001 ® (Equilibrium) (+15 C Temperature Approach) (Molar extent 0.

000 2673. .354 Temperature C Pressure bar Vapor Frac Mole Flow kmol/hr Mass Flow kg/hr Volume Flow cum/hr Enthalpy MMkcal/hr Mole Flow kmol/hr CO CO2 H2 WATER METHANOL METHANE NITROGEN BUTANOL DME ACETONE OXYGEN ETHANE PROPANE MEOHRXR Product 249.000 29091.000 0.Part 3: Methanol Synthesis Section Check Temperature C Pressure bar Vapor Frac Mole Flow kmol/hr To FL5 45.791 15637. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 271 ©1998 AspenTech.430 91.353 644.588 0.60 0. All rights reserved.739 413083.563 3137.129 799.046 8896.864 0.7 83.000 Septiembre 12.301 2140.0 75.144 13379.177 0.00 1.807 -559.428 0.845 1.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 272 ©1998 AspenTech.Part 4: Distillation Section To Furnace From FL4 From COOL1 From COOL2 FL5 TOPPING REFINING M4 MKWATER Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. .

Part 4: Distillation Section (Continued) 4.8 bar • Distillate vapor fraction = 99 mol% • Stage 2 heat duty = -7 Mmkcal/hr • Stage 51 heat duty Specified by the heat stream • Reboiler heat duty is provided via a heat stream from block COOL2 • Boil-up Ratio is approximately 0. Septiembre 12.52 • Valve trays • The column has two condensers. .5 bar and stage 51 = 1. Topping Column . To represent the liquid flow connections a pumparound can be used between stage 1 and 3. All rights reserved.TOPPING • Number of Stages = 51 (including condenser and reboiler) • Condenser Type = Partial Vapor/Liquid • Feed stage = 14 • Distillate has both liquid and vapor streams • Distillate rate = 1400 kg/hr • Pressure profile: stage 1 = 1.% of water in the stream feeding the Topping column (stream TOPFEED) to achieve 100 ppm methanol in the Refining column BTMS stream. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 273 ©1998 AspenTech. Distillation Section Makeup Steam .MKWATER • Stream of pure water • Flow = 10000 kg/hr • Pressure = 5 bar • Temperature = 40 C • Adjust the make-up water flow (stream MKWATER) to the CRUDE stream to achieve a stream composition of 23 wt.

REFINING • Number of Stages = 95 (including condenser and reboiler) • Condenser Type = Total • Distillate Rate = 1 kg/hr • Feed stage = 60 • Liquid Product sidedraw from Stage 4 @ 62000 kg/hr (Stream name – PRODUCT) • Liquid Product sidedraw from Stage 83 @ 550 kg/hr (Stream name – FUSELOIL) • Reflux rate = 188765 kg/hr • Pressure profile: stage 1= 1. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 274 ©1998 AspenTech.8 • Valve trays • To meet environmental regulations.Part 4: Distillation Section (Continued) Distillation Section (Continued) Refining Column . the bottoms stream must contain no more than 100ppm by weight of methanol as this stream is to be dumped to a nearby river. All rights reserved. ® . FL5 • Exit Pressure • Heat Duty M4 5 bar 0 MMkcal/hr • For water addition to the crude methanol Septiembre 12.5bar and stage 95=2bar • Reboiler heat duty is provided via a conventional reboiler supplemented by a heat stream from a heater block to stage 95 • Boil-up Ratio is approximately 4.

722 -186.736 1047.1 85.974 18871.001 1.201 83.00 1.058 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.500 1.059 0.000 0.000 0.004 26.000 0.117 0.681 0. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 275 ©1998 AspenTech.000 3029.001 0.285 0.52 2.000 0.50 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1054.00 1.000 0.000 0.276 0.005 0.733 82623.1 33.000 0.116 0.475 1388.000 0.334 0.000 0. All rights reserved.143 0.000 0.388 -2.000 0.000 0.000 0.031 0.000 0.000 0.004 0.267 0.000 0.199 0.014 107.000 7.175 573.000 0.000 1928.341 2995.966 0.733 0.000 550.896 11.000 0.000 0.000 0.95 0.000 0.000 0.391 -69.802 -0.851 1939.000 0.004 26.Part 4: Distillation Section Check TOPFEED LTENDS SECPURGE REFINE PRODUCT BTMS LIQPURGE FUSELOIL 43.537 0.798 0.633 -0.475 61800.000 0.942 0.8 75.031 19.000 0.004 0.80 1.587 -107.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Temperature C Pressure bar Vapor Frac Mole Flow kmol/hr Mass Flow kg/hr Volume Flow cum/hr Enthalpy MMkcal/hr Mole Flow kmol/hr CO CO2 H2 WATER METHANOL METHANE NITROGEN BUTANOL DME ACETONE OXYGEN ETHANE PROPANE Septiembre 12.020 -178.000 0.000 0.000 0.116 0.000 0.535 0.618 1928.8 90.000 0.003 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.267 0.000 0.782 0.117 0.002 0.1 120.50 1. .000 0.000 0.104 81223.000 0.000 0.003 0.000 0.014 0.50 1.000 0.000 0.4 5.000 1046.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.014 1054.002 -1.000 0.000 5.767 33.591 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.798 0.891 1.807 0.000 0.000 111.000 0.000 0.851 1945.8 33.000 0.000 0.975 21.000 0.910 11.1 74.

.Part 5: Furnace Section To REFORMER From FL5 Air From SPLIT2 FURNACE Fuel Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 276 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

) of oxygen in the FLUEGAS stream. Furnace Section Air to Furnace .FUEL • Flow = 9436 kg/hr • Conditions and composition are the same as for the natural gas stream Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 277 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. Fuel to Furnace .AIR • Temperature = 366 C • Pressure = 1 atm • Flow = 281946 kg/hr • Adjust the air flow to achieve 2%(vol.Part 5: Furnace Section (Continued) 5.

.Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 278 ©1998 AspenTech.

All rights reserved.Reach Your Potential True Additional Topics Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. 279 .

280 . Managing Your Files ® ©1998 AspenTech. Chapter 15. All rights reserved.Reach Your Potential True Maintaining Aspen Plus Simulations Objective: Introduce how to store simulations and retrieve them from your computer environment Aspen Plus References: Introduction to Aspen Plus • User Guide.

bkp *.cpm History Summary Problem Definition Report *.inp Format Description Binary ASCII ASCII Text Text Text ASCII Binary File containing simulation input and results and intermediate convergence information Archive file containing simulation input and results Template containing default inputs Simulation input Calculation history shown in the Control Panel Detailed calculation history and diagnostic messages Simulation results File containing arrays and intermediate convergence information used in the simulation calculations Simulation report Run Message *.sum *. All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 281 ©1998 AspenTech.his *.apt *.rep Text Septiembre 12.appdf *.apw *.File Formats in Aspen Plus File Type Extension Document Backup Template Input *.

File Type Characteristics • • Binary files . can be edited . 2001 Introduction Slide 282 ©1998 AspenTech.Upwardly compatible . ® .Not intended to be printed • Text files .Readable.Upwardly compatible .Intended to be printed to Aspen Plus Septiembre 12.Not readable.Transferable between operating systems . “readable” .Operating system and version specific .Contain no control characters. All rights reserved.Transferable between operating systems . not printable ASCII files .

apw) Simulation definition Yes Convergence info Yes Results Yes Flowsheet Graphics Yes User readable No Open/save speed High Space requirements High Backup (*.How to Store a Simulation Three ways to store simulations: Document (*. . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 283 ©1998 AspenTech.inp) Yes No No Yes/No Yes Lowest Lowest Septiembre 12.bkp) Yes No Yes Yes No Low Low Input (*.

Template Files Template files are used to set your personal preferences: • • • • • • • • • • ® Units of measurement Property sets for stream reports Composition basis Stream report format Global flow basis for input specifications Setting Free-Water option Selection for Stream-Class Property Method (Required) Component list Other application-specific defaults Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 284 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12. 2001 . All rights reserved.

. All rights reserved. The text on the Setup Specifications Description sheet will appear in the Preview window when the template file is selected in the New dialog box. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 285 ©1998 AspenTech. In order to have a personal template appear on the Personal sheet of the New dialog box. • Septiembre 12.How to Create a Personal Template • • Any flowsheet (complete or incomplete) can be saved as a template file. simply put the template file into the AP101\GUI\Templates\Personal folder.

All rights reserved. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 286 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12. Minimum RAM GUI only Win 95 and 32 MB Win 98 Windows NT 64 MB GUI and Engine 64 MB 96 MB • • ® Having more is better -. Active links increase needed RAM.if near minimum. avoid running too many other programs along with Aspen Plus. 2001 .Maintaining Your Computer • • Aspen Plus 10 runs best on a healthy computer.

for example) Defragment regularly (once a week).apw) that aren’t active .appdf.Maintaining Your Hard Disk • Keep plenty of free space on disk used for: . 2001 ® .Your Aspen working directory .Aspen temporary files (_4404ydj.Windows swap files Delete unneeded files: .Aspen document files (*.Old .make the free space contiguous. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 287 ©1998 AspenTech. . • • Septiembre 12. etc. even if Windows says you don’t need to -.appdf.his. . All rights reserved.

All rights reserved.Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 288 ©1998 AspenTech. .

Annotating Process Flowsheets Related Topics: • User Guide. Chapter 37. Chapter 14. Working with Other Windows Programs Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. 289 .Reach Your Potential True Customizing the Look of Your Flowsheet Objective: Introduce several ways of annotating your flowsheet to create informative Process Flow Diagrams Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. pressure and temperature Heat stream duty and work stream power Block duty and power • ® Use PFD mode Change flowsheet connectivity Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 290 ©1998 AspenTech. 2001 .Customizing the Process Flow Diagram • Add annotations Text Graphics Tables • • Add OLE objects Add a titlebox Add plots or diagrams Display global data Stream flowrate.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 291 ©1998 AspenTech. . Septiembre 12.OLE Objects • All of the elements can be turned on and off independently.Annotation .Global Data .Viewing • Use the View menu to select the elements that you wish to view: . All rights reserved.PFD Mode .

. click on the Stream Table button on the Results Summary Streams Material sheet. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 292 ©1998 AspenTech. Annotation objects can be attached to flowsheet elements such as streams or blocks. Septiembre 12. (Select Toolbar… from the View menu to select the Draw Toolbar if it is not visible.) To create a stream table.Adding Annotation • • • Use the Draw Toolbar to add text and graphics. All rights reserved.

000 40.029 LBMOL/HR LB/HR CUFT/HR MMBTU/HR LBMOL/HR 2.047 0.906 0. All rights reserved.60 0.7 14.000 4807.046 0.500 0.021 0.0 36.241 0.521 -0.0 14.000 44.408 2.983 4807.771 15648.000 41.859 0.202 42338.983 38.046 0.095 0.000 1. .000 2.1 14.050 2.224 38.359 106.033 4.202 1110.859 0.003 RECYCLE 130.500 0.017 2.085 0.069 F PSI COOL-OUT 130.772 93.000 80.047 0.70 1.342 4914.Example of a Stream Table Heat and Material Balance Table Stream ID Temperature Pressure Vapor Frac Mole Flow Mass Flow Volume Flow Enthalpy Mole Flow BENZENE PROPYLEN CUMENE Mole Frac BENZENE PROPYLEN CUMENE 0.70 1.513 REAC-OUT 854.980 PRODUCT 130.095 1.023 Septiembre 12.00 1.1 14. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 293 ©1998 AspenTech.054 44.983 1.085 40.342 4914.470 -0.033 4.950 0.490 FEED 220.095 0.224 38.782 0.431 1003.70 0.

.Adding Global Data • • On the Results View sheet when selecting Options from the Tools menu. choose the block and stream results that you want displayed as Global Data. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 294 ©1998 AspenTech. Check Global Data on the View menu to display the data on the flowsheet. 130 15 106 Q Temperature (F) Pressure (psi) Flow Rate (lb/hr) RECYCLE 220 36 4808 REACTOR 855 15 4914 FEED REAC-OUT Q=0 COOL-OUT Q=-2492499 Q=0 COOL 130 15 4914 SEP Duty (Btu/hr) 130 15 4808 PRODUCT Septiembre 12.

Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 295 ©1998 AspenTech. you can add or delete unit operation icons to the flowsheet for graphical purposes only. You must return to simulation mode if you want to make a change to the actual simulation flowsheet. All rights reserved.Using PFD Mode • • • In this mode. PFD Mode is indicated by the Aqua border around the flowsheet. • Septiembre 12. 2001 ® . Using PFD mode means that you can change flowsheet connectivity to match that of your plant. PFD-style drawing is completely separate from the graphical simulation flowsheet.

some pieces of equipment may not need to be explicitly modeled in the simulation flowsheet. the pressure change can be neglected or included in another unit operation block. • On the other hand. only one unit operation icon is needed to represent the unit in the plant. it may be necessary to use more than one unit operation block to model a single piece of equipment in a plant. In the report. 2001 ® . pumps are frequently not modeled in the simulation flowsheet. - For example. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 296 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. - For example.Examples of When to Use PFD Mode • In the simulation flowsheet. a reactor with a liquid product and a vent may need to be modeled using an RStoic reactor and a Flash2 block. Septiembre 12.

Annotation Workshop Objective: Use annotation to create a process flow diagram for the cyclohexane flowsheet Part A: Using the cyclohexane production Workshop (saved as CYCLOHEX.BKP). . All rights reserved. Part B: Add a title to the flowsheet diagram. Part C: Add a stream table to the flowsheet diagram. Part D: Using PFD Mode. add a pump for the BZIN stream for graphical purposes only. display all stream and block global data. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 297 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12.

Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 298 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.

299 .Reach Your Potential True Estimation of Physical Properties Objectives: Provide an overview of estimating physical property parameters in Aspen Plus Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. Estimating Property Parameters • Physical Property Methods and Models Reference Manual. Chapter 8. Property Parameterto Aspen Plus Introduction Estimation ® ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. Chapter 30.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 300 ©1998 AspenTech. . NRTL and UNIQUAC . • Experimental data can be incorporated into estimation.Pure component physical property constants .Group parameters for UNIFAC • Estimations are based on group-contribution methods and corresponding-states correlations.What is Property Estimation? • Property Estimation is a system to estimate parameters required by physical property models. All rights reserved.Binary interaction parameters for Wilson. It can be used to estimate: . Septiembre 12.Parameters for temperature-dependent models .

Data Regression.Using Property Estimation • Property Estimation can be used in two ways: . • Property Estimation information is accessed in the Properties Estimation folder. .On a stand-alone basis: Property Estimation Run Type . Property Analysis. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 301 ©1998 AspenTech. PROPERTIES PLUS or Assay Data Analysis • You can use Property Estimation to estimate properties for both databank and non-databank components. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.Within another Run Type: Flowsheet.

as well as the available estimation methods and their respective requirements. Septiembre 12. Chapter 30. . Estimating Property Parameters. • This same information is also available under the on-line help in the estimation forms. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 302 ©1998 AspenTech.Estimation Methods and Requirements • User Guide. has a complete list of properties that can be estimated. All rights reserved.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 303 ©1998 AspenTech. Enter any experimental data using Parameters or Data forms. 3. . Define molecular structure on the Properties Molecular Structure form. All rights reserved.Experimental data such as normal boiling point (TB) is very important for many estimation methods. . 2. Septiembre 12.Steps For Using Property Estimation 1. Activate Property Estimation and choose property estimation options on the Properties Estimation Input form. It should be entered whenever possible.

see Aspen Plus Physical Property Data Reference Manual. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 304 ©1998 AspenTech.Defining Molecular Structure • Molecular structure is required for all group-contribution methods used in Property Estimation. or . Chapter 3.Define molecular structure in the general format and allow Aspen Plus to determine functional groups. Group Contribution Method Functional Groups. You can: . All rights reserved.Define molecular structure in terms of functional groups for particular methods Reference: For a list of available group-contribution method functional groups. . Septiembre 12.

choose the component. Assign a number to each atom. 2. 4. and select Edit. …) • Specify the type of bond that connects the two atoms (single.Steps For Defining General Structure 1. On the Molecular Structure General sheet.) 3. O. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 305 ©1998 AspenTech. on the Components Specifications form. . double. All rights reserved. S. Describe two atoms at a time: • Specify the types of atoms (C. omitting hydrogen. …) Note: If the molecule is a non-databank component. enter a Component ID. (The numbers must be consecutive starting with 1. Sketch the structure of the molecule on paper. define the molecule by its connectivity. Septiembre 12. Go to the Properties Molecular Structure Object Manager. but do not enter a Component name or Formula.

All rights reserved.Sketch the structure of the molecule. 2001 ® C4 O5 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 306 ©1998 AspenTech. and assign a number to each atom. C1 C2 C3 Septiembre 12. omitting hydrogen. .Example of Defining Molecular Structure • Example of defining molecular structure for isobutyl alcohol using the general method .

two atoms at a time. and select Edit. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 307 ©1998 AspenTech.Example of Defining Molecular Structure • Go to the Properties Molecular Structure Object Manager. All rights reserved. choose the component. Septiembre 12. • On Properties Molecular Structure General sheet. describe molecule by its connectivity. .

Atom Types • Current available atom types: Atom Type C O N S B Si F CL Br I Al ® Description Carbon Oxygen Nitrogen Sulfur Boron Silicon Fluorine Chlorine Bromine Iodine Aluminum Atom Type Description P Phosphorous Zn Zinc Ga Gallium Ge Germanium As Arsenic Cd Cadmium Sn Tin Sb Antimony Hg Mercury Pb Lead Bi Bismuth Slide 308 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus .

and Saturated hydrocarbon chain bonds. Saturated 7-membered ring. Septiembre 12. Saturated 5-membered ring.Double bond .Saturated 7-membered ring .Triple bond .Single bond .Bond Types • Current available bond types: . .Saturated 5-membered ring . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 309 ©1998 AspenTech. Saturated 6membered ring. All rights reserved.Benzene ring .Saturated hydrocarbon chain Note: You must assign consecutive atom numbers to Benzene ring.Saturated 6-membered ring .

3. 2. Define molecular structure on the Properties Molecular Structure form. It should be entered whenever possible. . . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 310 ©1998 AspenTech. Activate Property Estimation and choose property estimation options on the Properties Estimation Input form. All rights reserved.Experimental data such as normal boiling point (TB) is very important for many estimation methods. Enter any experimental data using Parameters or Data forms. Septiembre 12.Steps For Using Property Estimation 1.

6 C . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 311 ©1998 AspenTech.6 C . .Normal boiling point (TB) = 107.Critical pressure (PC) = 43 bar • Enter this data into the simulation to improve the estimated values. All rights reserved.Critical temperature (TC) = 274. Septiembre 12.Example of Entering Additional Data • The following data was obtained for isobutyl alcohol. .

Example of Entering Additional Data • Go to the Properties Parameters Pure Component Object Manager and create a new Scalar parameter form. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 312 ©1998 AspenTech. the components. . All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. • Enter the parameters. and the values.

2. Define molecular structure on the Properties Molecular Structure form. 3. .Experimental data such as normal boiling point (TB) is very important for many estimation methods. Septiembre 12. Activate Property Estimation and choose property estimation options on the Properties Estimation Input form. It should be entered whenever possible. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 313 ©1998 AspenTech.Steps For Using Property Estimation 1. Enter any experimental data using Parameters or Data forms. All rights reserved.

Estimate all missing parameters Estimates all missing required parameters and any parameters you may request in the optional Pure Component. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 314 ©1998 AspenTech. and UNIFAC-Group sheets . . All rights reserved.Estimate only the selected parameters Estimates on the parameter types you select on this sheet (and then specify on the appropriate additional sheets) Septiembre 12. Binary. and select one of the following: . T-Dependent.Activating Property Estimation • To turn on Property Estimation. go to the Properties Estimation Input Setup sheet.

and import them into other simulations (Flowsheet.) Septiembre 12. Property Analysis. . All rights reserved. structures.Property Estimation Notes • You can save your property data specifications. or Assay Data Analysis Run-Types. Data Regression. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 315 ©1998 AspenTech. and estimates as backup files.

O .CH2 . Ethylcellosolve is not in any of the Aspen Plus databanks.CH2 . Formula: TB = 195 C Septiembre 12. Use a Run Type of Property Estimation.CH2 . ethycellosolve. All rights reserved.) The formula for the component is shown below. and estimate the properties for the new component.CH2 . . (Detailed instructions are included on the following slide. 2001 ® CH3 .OH Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 316 ©1998 AspenTech.CH2 . along with the normal boiling point obtained from literature.Property Estimation Workshop Objective: Estimate the properties of a dimer.O .

Run the estimation. Change the Run Type back to Flowsheet on the Setup Specifications Global sheet. . Go to the Properties Parameters Pure Component Object Manager and create a scalar parameter form. Now. On the General sheet. On the Properties Molecular Structure Object Manager.BKP. and change the Run Type on the Setup Specifications Global sheet to Property Estimation. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 317 ©1998 AspenTech. on the Components Specifications Selection sheet. Enter the normal boiling point (TB) of DIMER as 195 C. Go to the Properties Estimation Input Setup sheet. and examine the results. All rights reserved. select DIMER and click Edit. and choose Do not estimate any parameters. Note that the results of the estimation are automatically written to parameters forms. for use in other simulations. Septiembre 12. Save this file as PCES.Property Estimation Workshop (Continued) • • • • • • • • • • • • ® Open a new run. enter the structure. it is possible to add a flowsheet and use this component. Enter a new non-databank component as Component ID DIMER.

Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 318 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. Electrolyte Simulation Aspen Plus Introduction to ® ©1998 AspenTech.Reach Your Potential True Electrolytes Objective: Introduce the electrolyte capabilities in Aspen Plus Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. 319 . Chapter 5. Specifying Components • Physical Property Methods and Models Reference Manual. Chapter 6.

bases or salts • Sour water solutions • Aqueous amines or hot carbonate for gas sweetening Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 320 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. .Electrolytes Examples • Solutions with acids.

Characteristics of an Electrolyte System • Some molecular species dissociate partially or completely into ions in a liquid solvent • Liquid phase reactions are always at chemical equilibrium • Presence of ions in the liquid phase requires non-ideal solution thermodynamics • Possible salt precipitation Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 321 ©1998 AspenTech.

.Acetic Acid Soluble Gases . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 322 ©1998 AspenTech.Henry’s Law components .Types of Components • Solvents .Oxygen .Nitrogen .Methanol .Carbon Dioxide • Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.Water .Standard molecular species .

2001 ® . .Fe(CN)63Salts .Types of Components (Continued) • Ions . All rights reserved.CaSO4•2H2O (gypsum) .Each precipitated salt is a new pure component.H3O+ .Species with a charge .NaCl(s) .Cl.Na2CO3•NaHCO3 •2H2O (trona) Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 323 ©1998 AspenTech.Na+ . • Septiembre 12.CaCO3(s) .OH.

All rights reserved.Results reported in terms of base components present before considering solution chemistry . Septiembre 12.Ions and precipitated salts cannot be apparent components . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 324 ©1998 AspenTech. salts and molecular species present after considering solution chemistry Apparent component approach .Specifications must be made in terms of apparent components and not in terms of ions or solid salts • » Results are equivalent.Result reported in terms of the ions. .Apparent and True Components • True component approach .

Cl-.Apparent components • H2O.Apparent and True Components Example • NaCl in water . Na+.True components: • H2O. NaCl . . NaCl(s) Septiembre 12.Solution chemistry • NaCl • Na+ + Cl--> <--> Na + + ClNaCl(s) . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 325 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® .Reaction equilibrium constant values .Henry’s constant correlation parameters Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 326 ©1998 AspenTech.ELECNRTL interaction parameters .Salt solubility parameters . All rights reserved.Electrolyte Wizard • • • • • • Generates new components (ions and solid salts) Revises the Pure component databank search order so that the first databank searched is now ASPENPCD. Generates reactions among components Sets the Property method to ELECNRTL Creates a Henry’s Component list Retrieves parameters for . Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 327 ©1998 AspenTech. Simplifying the Chemistry can make the simulation more robust and decrease execution time.Electrolyte Wizard (Continued) • Generated chemistry can be modified. . » Note: Septiembre 12. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the Chemistry is representative of the actual chemical system.

.Eliminating irrelevant salt precipitation reactions . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 328 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Adding species and/or reactions that are not in the electrolytes expert system database .Eliminating irrelevant equilibrium reactions Septiembre 12.Adding to the list of Henry’s components .Eliminating irrelevant species .Simplifying the Chemistry • Typical modifications include: .

RCSTR. All rights reserved.Limitations of Electrolytes • Restrictions using the True component approach: .Liquid-liquid equilibrium cannot be calculated. and RBatch Distl. . DSTWU and SCFrac MultiFrac and PetroFrac Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 329 ©1998 AspenTech.The following models may not be used: • Equilibrium reactors: • Kinetic reactors: • Shortcut distillation: • Rigorous distillation: RGibbs and REquil RPlug.

Chemistry may not contain any volatile species on the right side of the reactions.Input specification cannot be in terms of ions or solid salts. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 330 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.Chemistry for liquid-liquid equilibrium may not contain dissociation reactions.Limitations of Electrolytes (Continued) • Restrictions using the Apparent component approach: . . .

1 kmol/hr NaOH Septiembre 12. Create a simple flowsheet to mix and flash two feed streams containing aqueous electrolytes. 2001 ® P-drop = 0 Adiabatic LIQUID Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 331 ©1998 AspenTech. Temp = 25 C Pres = 1 bar 10 kmol/hr H2O Filename: ELEC1. Use the Electrolyte Wizard to generate the Chemistry.75 1. .Electrolyte Demonstration Objective: Create a flowsheet using electrolytes. All rights reserved.BKP 1 kmol/hr HCl HCL VAPOR MIX NAOH MIXED FLASH Temp = 25 C Pres = 1 bar 10 kmol/hr H2O MIXER FLASH2 Isobaric Molar vapor fraction = 0.

2.Steps for Using Electrolytes 1. All rights reserved. Step 4: Review physical properties specifications and modify the generated Henry components list and reactions. Septiembre 12. Step 3: Select simulation approach for electrolyte calculations. There are 4 steps: - Step 1: Define base components and select reaction generation options. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 332 ©1998 AspenTech. Step 2: Remove any undesired species or reactions from the generated list. . Click on the Elec Wizard button to generate components and reactions for electrolyte systems. Specify the possible apparent components on the Components Specifications Selection sheet.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus .BKP Slide 333 ©1998 AspenTech. Use the Electrolyte Wizard to generate the Chemistry. save as filename: ELEC. Septiembre 12. Use the true component approach. Temperature = 25C Pressure = 1 bar Flowrate = 10 kmol/hr 5 mole% sulfuric acid solution Note: Remove from the chemistry: CaSO 4(s) CaSO 4•1:2W:A(s) WASTEWAT B1 LIME LIQUID Temperature = 25C Temperature = 25C P-drop = 0 Pressure = 1 bar Flowrate = 10 kmol/hr 5 mole% lime (calcium hydroxide) solution When finished.Electrolyte Workshop Objective: Create a flowsheet using electrolytes. Create a simple flowsheet to model the treatment of a sulfuric acid waste water stream using lime (Calcium Hydroxide). All rights reserved.

001 CO2 0.997 NH3 0.001 H2S 0.000 lbs/hr Septiembre 12.001 B1 Theoretical trays: 9 (does not include condenser) Partial condenser Reflux Ratio (Molar): 25 No reboiler STEAM On stage 10 P = 15 psia Vapor frac = 1 2. 2001 ® BOTTOMS Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 334 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.000 lbs/hr SOURWAT VAPOR Mass fractions: H2O 0.Sour Water Stripper Workshop Saturated vapor Above stage 3 P = 15 psia 10.

. Select the apparent approach and remove all solid salts used in the generated reactions. 2. Question: Why aren’t the ionic species’ compositions displayed on the results forms? How can they be added? Septiembre 12. generate the electrolytes using the Electrolytes Wizard.Sour Water Stripper Workshop (Continued) 1. Open a new Electrolytes with English units flowsheet. After drawing the flowsheet and entering the necessary components. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 335 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

The target is 190 F.BKP Septiembre 12. Use the targets and variables from part 3. Add a sensitivity analysis a) Vary the steam flow rate and tabulate the ammonia concentration in the bottoms stream. Create design specifications a) After hiding the sensitivity blocks. solve the column with two design specifications. The target is 50 ppm. . b) Vary the column reflux ratio and observe the condenser temperature. 4. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 336 ©1998 AspenTech. Save as: SOURWAT.Sour Water Stripper Workshop (Continued) 3.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 337 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Septiembre 12. .

All rights reserved. Property Model Descriptions Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech.Reach Your Potential True Solids Handling Objective: Provide an overview of the solid handling capabilities Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. 338 . Chapter 6. Chapter 3. Specifying Components • Physical Property Methods and Models Reference Manual.

Vapor and liquid components .Solids that are inert to phase equilibrium and salt precipitation/solubility • Nonconventional Solids (NC Solids) .Classes of Components • Conventional Components .Solid salts in solution chemistry • Conventional Inert Solids (CI Solids) . All rights reserved. salt. .Heterogeneous substances inert to phase. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 339 ©1998 AspenTech. and chemical equilibrium that cannot be represented with a molecular structure Septiembre 12.

All rights reserved.Nonconventional .Solid . . choose the appropriate component type in the Type column.Conventional .Conventional Inert Solids . .Nonconventional Solids Septiembre 12.Specifying Component Type • When specifying components on the Components Specifications Selection sheet. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 340 ©1998 AspenTech.Conventional Components .

sodium chloride. ð e. water. chloride ions ð Located in the MIXED substream Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 341 ©1998 AspenTech. Components have a molecular weight.g. All rights reserved. . oxygen. sodium ions. nitrogen.Conventional Components • • Components participate in vapor and liquid equilibrium along with salt and chemical equilibrium.

carbon.Conventional Inert Solids (CI Solids) • • • Components are inert to phase equilibrium and salt precipitation/solubility. Components have a molecular weight. All rights reserved. sulfur ð Located in the CISOLID substream Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 342 ©1998 AspenTech.g. Chemical equilibrium and reaction with conventional components is possible. . ð e.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 343 ©1998 AspenTech.g. salt or chemical equilibrium. • Components are heterogeneous substances and do not have a molecular weight. coal. All rights reserved. wood pulp ðLocated in the NC Solid substream Septiembre 12. ash. ðe.Nonconventional Solids (NC Solids) • Components are inert to phase. char. • Chemical reaction with conventional and CI Solid components is possible. .

Modified in unit operation models • Component attributes are carried in the material stream.Component Attributes • Component attributes typically represent the composition of a component in terms of some set of identifiable constituents • Component attributes can be . Septiembre 12.Assigned by the user . All rights reserved. • Properties of nonconventional components are calculated by the physical property system using component attributes. .Initialized in streams . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 344 ©1998 AspenTech.

weight % dry basis SULFANAL Forms of sulfur analysis. Ash 2. Pyritic 2. Sulfur 7.Component Attribute Descriptions Attribute Type PROXANAL Elements 1. Fixed Carbon 3. dry basis General constituent analysis. Ash 1. Chlorine 6. weight or volume % GENANAL Septiembre 12. Constituent 20 Description Proximate analysis. Nitrogen 5. Carbon 3. Constituent 2 : 20. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 345 ©1998 AspenTech. Organic 1. Moisture 2. Sulfate 3. Hydrogen 4. Constituent 1 2. All rights reserved. Oxygen 1. Volatile Matter 4. weight % of original coal. weight %dry basis ULTANAL Ultimate analysis.

• For nonconventional solids . All rights reserved.Property models are specified on the Properties Advanced NC-Props form. .Enthalpy. Septiembre 12. free energy and molar volume are computed.Enthalpy and mass density are computed. .Solid Properties • For conventional components and conventional solids . . entropy.Property models in the Property Method specified on the Properties Specification Global sheet are used. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 346 ©1998 AspenTech.

Solids Properties .Aspen Plus and DIPPR model parameters . Free Energy. All rights reserved.List SOLIDS databank before INORGANIC Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 347 ©1998 AspenTech.Combines heat of formation and free energies of formation with heat capacity models . 2001 ® . Entropy and Heat Capacity • Barin Equations .Conventional Solids For Enthalpy.Single parameter set for all properties .List INORGANIC databank before SOLIDS • Conventional Equations .Multiple parameter sets may be available for selected temperature ranges . Septiembre 12.

.Parameter name: CPSP01 • Solid Molar Volume . All rights reserved.Conventional Solids • Solid Heat Capacity .Used to calculate density . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 348 ©1998 AspenTech.Volume polynomial model V S = C1 + C2T + C3T 2 + C4T 3 + C5T 4 C4 C5 C6 + + T T 2 T3 .Solids Properties . entropy and free energy .Used to calculate enthalpy.Parameter name: VSPOLY Septiembre 12.Heat capacity polynomial model C oS = C1 + C2T + C3T 2 + p .

General heat capacity polynomial model: ENTHGEN . All rights reserved.General density polynomial model: DNSTYGEN . • Septiembre 12. 2001 ® .Uses a mass fraction weighted average .Based on the GENANAL attribute .Nonconventional Solids • Enthalpy .Uses a mass fraction weighted average .Parameter name: DENGEN Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 349 ©1998 AspenTech.Solids Properties .Based on the GENANAL attribute .Parameter name: HCGEN Density .

All rights reserved. .Solids Properties .Coal density model: DCOALIGT .Based on the ULTANAL and SULFANAL attributes • Septiembre 12. PROXANAL and SULFANAL attributes Density .Special Models for Coal • Enthalpy . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 350 ©1998 AspenTech.Based on the ULTANAL.Coal enthalpy model: HCOALGEN .

.Built-in Material Stream Classes Stream Class CONVEN* MIXNC MIXCISLD MIXNCPSD MIXCIPSD MIXCINC MIXCINCPSD Description Conventional components only Conventional and nonconventional solids Conventional components and inert solids Conventional components and nonconventional solids with particle size distribution Conventional components and inert solids with particle size distribution Conventional components and inert solids and nonconventional solids Conventional components and nonconventional solids with particle size distribution * system default Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 351 ©1998 AspenTech.

Material streams of any class are accepted.The same stream class should be used for inlet and - outlet streams (exceptions: Mixer and ClChng). All rights reserved.Unit Operation Models • General Principles . Unless otherwise specified. RStoic). solids leave with the liquid. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 352 ©1998 AspenTech. outlet solid substreams are in thermal equilibrium with the MIXED substream. In vapor-liquid separation. Attributes (components or substream) not recognized are passed unaltered through the block. Septiembre 12. Some models allow specifications for each substream present (examples: Sep. .

All rights reserved.Solids Workshop 1 Objective: Model a conventional solids dryer. Dry SiO2 from a water content of 0.1% using air. Notes: Change the Stream class type to: MIXCISLD. Septiembre 12.5% to 0. The pressure and temperature has to be the same in all the sub-streams of a stream. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 353 ©1998 AspenTech. Put the SiO2 in the CISOLID substream.

% SiO2 [SiO2/(SiO2 +Mixed)] DRY Temp = 70 F Pres = 14.9 wt. All rights reserved.21 mole% O2 AIR DRYER WET FLASH2 AIR-OUT Design specification: Vary the air flow rate from 1 to 10 lbmol/hr to achieve 99.7 psia 995 lb/hr SiO2 5 lb/hr H 2O Pressure Drop = 0 Adiabatic Use the SOLIDS Property Method When finished. save as filename: SOLIDWK1. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 354 ©1998 AspenTech.7 psia Flow = 1 lbmol/hr 0.BKP Septiembre 12.79 mole% N2 0. .Solids Workshop 1 (Continued) Temp = 190 F Pres = 14.

and an Electrostatic precipitator) and their particulate separation efficiency can be changed by varying their design and operating conditions. . surface erosion. Bag-filter. In this workshop. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 355 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12.g. The final choice of equipment is a balance between the technical performance and the cost associated with using a particular unit. Venturi-scrubber.. various options for removing particulates from the syngas obtained by coal gasification are compared. plugging of orifices and packing). It is therefore necessary to remove most of the particulate materials from the gaseous stream. fouling.Solids Workshop 2 Objective: Use the solids unit operations to model the particulate removal from a feed of gasifier off gases. Various options are available for this purpose (Cyclone. All rights reserved. The processing of gases containing small quantities of particulate materials is rendered difficult by the tendency of the particulates to interfere with most operations (e.

9 G-SCRUB DUPL FEED F-ESP S-SCRUB V-SCRUB G-ESP Design Mode Separation Efficiency = 0. Drop = 0.20 H2 0.19 CO2 0.5 Particle size distribution (PSD) Size limit wt. save as filename: SOLIDWK2.35 SO2 0. % [mu] 0. .02 O2 0.9 Dielectric constant = 1.05 H2S 0.Solids Workshop 2 (Continued) Temp = 650 C Pres = 1 bar Gas Flowrate = 1000 kmol/hr Ash Flowrate = 200 kg/hr Composition (mole-frac) CO 0.01 H2O 0.BKP Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.44 30 44.9 F-CYC Temp = 40 C S-CYC Pres = 1 bar Water Flowrate = 700 kg/hr LIQ F-SCRUB Design Mode Separation Efficiency = 0.05 N2 0.63 10 63-90 20 90-130 15 130-200 10 200-280 15 F-BF ESP S-ESP G-BF Design Mode Max. 2001 ® FAB-FILT S-BF Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 356 ©1998 AspenTech.048 bar When finished.03 CH4 0. Pres.10 G-CYC CYC Design Mode High Efficiency Separation Efficiency = 0.

Solids Workshop 2 (Continued) • • Coal ash is mainly clay and heavy metal oxides and can be considered a non-conventional component. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 357 ©1998 AspenTech. PROXANAL. PROXANAL. The PSD limits can be changed on the Setup Substreams PSD form. 2001 . All rights reserved. Use the IDEAL Property Method. For ash. • • • ® Septiembre 12. These are specified on the Properties Advanced NC-Props form. HCOALGEN and DCOALIGT can be used to calculate the enthalpy and material density of ash using the ultimate. SULFANAL). proximate. SULFANAL) are specified on the Stream Input form. and sulfur analyses (ULTANAL. Component attributes (ULTANAL. zero all non-ash attributes.

All rights reserved.Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 358 ©1998 AspenTech. .

Optimization Related Topics: • User Guide. Chapter 22.Reach Your Potential True Optimization Objective: Introduce the optimization capability in Aspen Plus Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. Chapter 17. Accessing Flowsheet Variables Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. 359 . Convergence • User Guide. Chapter 18. All rights reserved.

.Optimization • Used to maximize/minimize an objective function • Objective function is expressed in terms of flowsheet variables and In-Line Fortran. All rights reserved. • Optimization can have zero or more constraints. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 360 ©1998 AspenTech. • Constraints can be equalities or inequalities. • Optimization is located under /Data/Model Analysis Tools/Optimization • Constraint specification is under /Data/Model Analysis Tools/Constraint Septiembre 12.

B. find the reactor temperature and inlet amount of reactant A that maximizes the profit from this reactor. Septiembre 12.Optimization Example A. E PRODUCT For an existing reactor.0. D. . All rights reserved.30 / lb $ 0.20 /lb A. C. The reactor can only handle a maximum cooling load of Q. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 361 ©1998 AspenTech. B FEED REACTOR A + B --> C + D + E Desired Product C By-product D Waste Product E $ 1.11 / lb $ .

All rights reserved.11*(lb/hr D) .1.Reactor temperature .Inlet amount of reactant A Septiembre 12.Optimization Example (Continued) • What are the measured (sampled) variables? . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 362 ©1998 AspenTech. .30*(lb/hr C) + 0.The calculated duty of the reactor can not exceed Q.Outlet flowrates of components C. • What are the manipulated (varied) variables? .20*(lb/hr E) • What is the constraint? . E • What is the objective function to be maximized? .0. D.

Specify objective function (expression).This is the Fortran expression that will be maximized or minimized (Optimization Objective & Constraints sheet). Septiembre 12. . 2.Steps for Using Optimization 1. 3. . . Specify maximization or minimization of objective function (Optimization Objective & Constraints sheet). All rights reserved.These are the flowsheet variables used to calculate the objective function (Optimization Define sheet). 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 363 ©1998 AspenTech. Identify measured (sampled) variables.

.These are the constraints used during the optimization (Optimization Objective & Constraints sheet).These are the variables that the optimization block will change to maximize/minimize the objective function (Optimization Vary sheet). . 6. All rights reserved. Specify constraints (optional). Specify manipulated (varied) variables.These are the lower and upper bounds within which to vary the manipulated variable (Optimization Vary sheet). Septiembre 12. Specify bounds for manipulated (varied) variables. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 364 ©1998 AspenTech. 5. .Steps for Using Optimization (Continued) 4. .

The optimization algorithm only finds local maxima and minima in the objective function. the constraints. 3. This can be accomplished by simply multiplying or dividing the function. 2. . by starting at a different point in the solution space. in some cases. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 365 ©1998 AspenTech. The convergence of the optimization can be sensitive to the initial values of the manipulated variables. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.Notes 1. It is theoretically possible to obtain a different maximum/minimum in the objective function. and the manipulated variables are in the range of 1 to 100. It is best if the objective.

Optimization blocks also have convergence blocks associated with them.Notes (Continued) 4. 6. Any general techniques used with convergence blocks can be used if the optimization does not converge. If an optimization does not converge. 5. . Equality constraints within an optimization are similar to design specifications. run sensitivity studies with the same manipulated variables as the optimization. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 366 ©1998 AspenTech. to ensure that the objective function is not discontinuous with respect to any of the manipulated variables. Septiembre 12.

and minimize the total usage of steam in streams STEAM1 and STEAM2.Optimization Workshop Objective: Optimize steam usage for a process. Set up the simulation as shown below. The stream FEED contains 1400 lb/hr of Dichloro-Methane and 98600 lb/hr of water at 100oF and 24 psia. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 367 ©1998 AspenTech. TOWER1 and TOWER2. are run adiabatically at 19. The two flashes. The flowsheet shown below is part of a Dichloro-Methane solvent recovery system.7 psia respectively. Make sure stream flows are reported in mass flow and mass fraction units before running. All rights reserved. Refer to the Notes slides for some hints on the previous page if there are problems converging the optimization.7 and 18.000 lb/hr for the flowrate of the two steam streams. both of which contain saturated steam at 200 psia. Septiembre 12. The maximum allowable concentration of Dichloro-Methane in the stream EFFLUENT from TOWER2 is 150 ppm (mass) to within a tolerance of a tenth of a ppm. Use the NRTL Property Method. Use bounds of 1000 lb/hr to 20. .

BKP Septiembre 12. save as filename: OPT. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 368 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. .Optimization Workshop (Continued) TOP1 STEAM1 TOWER1 FEED TOP2 TOWER2 BOT1 STEAM2 EFFLUENT When finished.

Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 369 ©1998 AspenTech. .

Columns Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech.Reach Your Potential True RadFrac Convergence Objective: Introduce the convergence algorithms and initialization strategies available in RadFrac Aspen Plus References: • Unit Operation Models Reference Manual. 370 . Chapter 4. All rights reserved.

RadFrac Convergence Methods RadFrac provides a variety of convergence methods for solving separation problems. 2001 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 371 ©1998 AspenTech. Each convergence method represents a convergence algorithm and an initialization method. The following convergence methods are available: • • • • • • ® Standard (default) Petroleum / Wide-Boiling Strongly non-ideal liquid Azeotropic Cryogenic Custom Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved.

.Convergence Methods (Continued) Method Standard Petroleum / Wide-boiling Strongly non-ideal liquid Azeotropic Cryogenic Custom Algorithm Standard Sum-Rates Nonideal Newton Standard select any Initialization Standard Standard Standard Azeotropic Cryogenic select any Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 372 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

.RadFrac Convergence Algorithms RadFrac provides four convergence algorithms: • • • • Standard (with Absorber=Yes or No) Sum-Rates Nonideal Newton Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 373 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

.Standard Algorithm The Standard (default. Absorber=No) algorithm: • • • • Uses the original inside-out formulation Is effective and fast for most problems Solves design specifications in a middle loop May have difficulties with extremely wide-boiling or highly non-ideal mixtures Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 374 ©1998 AspenTech.

. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 375 ©1998 AspenTech.Standard Algorithm (Continued) The Standard algorithm with Absorber=Yes: • • • • • Uses a modified formulation similar to the classical sum-rates algorithm Applies to absorbers and strippers only Has fast convergence Solves design specifications in a middle loop May have difficulties with highly non-ideal mixtures Septiembre 12.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 376 ©1998 AspenTech.Sum-Rates Algorithm The Sum-Rates algorithm: • • • • Uses a modified formulation similar to the classical sum-rates algorithm Solves design specifications simultaneously with the column-describing equations Is effective and fast for wide boiling mixtures and problems with many design specifications May have difficulties with highly non-ideal mixtures Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. .

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 377 ©1998 AspenTech.Nonideal Algorithm The Nonideal algorithm: • • • • Includes a composition dependency in the local physical property models Uses the continuation convergence method Solves design specifications in a middle loop Is effective for non-ideal problems Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. .

2001 .Newton Algorithm The Newton algorithm: • • • • • • ® Is a classic implementation of the Newton method Solves all column-describing equations simultaneously Uses the dogleg strategy of Powell to stabilize convergence Can solve design specifications simultaneously or in an outer loop Handles non-ideality well. with excellent convergence in the vicinity of the solution Is recommended for azeotropic distillation columns Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 378 ©1998 AspenTech. Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.

Vapor-Liquid-Liquid Calculations You can use the Standard. .The middle loop approach for all other algorithms Septiembre 12.Either the simultaneous (default) loop or the middle loop approach for the Newton algorithm . All rights reserved. Vapor-Liquid-Liquid calculations: • Handle column calculations involving two liquid phases rigorously • Handle decanters • Solve design specifications using: . Newton and Nonideal algorithms for 3-phase Vapor-Liquid-Liquid systems. select Vapor-Liquid-Liquid in the Valid Phases field. On the RadFrac Setup Configuration sheet. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 379 ©1998 AspenTech.

The Azeotropic algorithm is also another alternative for highly non-ideal systems. . If the Standard method fails: • Use the Petroleum / Wide Boiling method if the mixture is very wide-boiling.Convergence Method Selection For Vapor-Liquid systems. • Use the Azeotropic method for azeotropic distillation problems with multiple solutions possible. start with the Standard convergence method. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 380 ©1998 AspenTech. if the column is an absorber or a stripper. • Use the Strongly non-ideal liquid method if the mixture is highly non-ideal. All rights reserved. • Use the Custom method and change Absorber to Yes on the RadFrac Convergence Algorithm sheet.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 381 ©1998 AspenTech. try the Custom method with the Nonideal or the Newton algorithm. If the Standard method fails. Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved.Convergence Method Selection (Continued) For Vapor-Liquid-Liquid systems: • • Start by selecting Vapor-Liquid-Liquid in the Valid Phases field of the RadFrac Setup Configuration sheet and use the Standard convergence method.

This method: • • • Performs flash calculations on composite feed to obtain average vapor and liquid compositions Assumes a constant composition profile Estimates temperature profiles based on bubble and dew point temperatures of composite feed Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 382 ©1998 AspenTech.RadFrac Initialization Method Standard is the default Initialization method for RadFrac.

All rights reserved.Specialized Initialization Methods Four specialized Initialization methods are available. . Use: Crude Chemical Azeotropic Cryogenic For: Wide boiling systems with multi-draw columns Narrow boiling chemical systems Azeotropic distillation columns Cryogenic applications Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 383 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® . hydrogen-rich). All rights reserved.Estimates RadFrac does not usually require estimates for temperature. flow and composition profiles. Composition estimates for highly non-ideal. Septiembre 12. Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 384 ©1998 AspenTech. extremely wide-boiling (for example. RadFrac may require: • • • Temperature estimates as a first trial in case of convergence problems Liquid and/or vapor flow estimates for the separation of wide boiling mixtures. azeotropic distillation or vapor-liquid-liquid systems.

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 385 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.Composition Estimates The following example illustrates the need for composition estimates in an extremely wide-boiling point system: Septiembre 12.

33.feed on stage 17 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 386 ©1998 AspenTech.88 bar. 2001 ® .5%wt HCl.partial condenser (vapor distillate) .kettle reboiler .19.(VCM : vinyl-chloride. EDC : 1. • Septiembre 12.2-dichloroethane) Column . All rights reserved. bottom 18. 18 bar .5%wt VCM. HCl column in a VCM production plant • Feed .pressure : top 17.130000 kg/hr at 50C. 47%wt EDC .33 theoretical stages .RadFrac Convergence Workshop Objective: Apply the convergence hints explained in this section.24 bar .

7. Specify that the mass reflux ratio is 0. Use Peng-Robinson equation of state (PENG-ROB). Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. ® Temperature profile Composition profile Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 387 ©1998 AspenTech.RadFrac Convergence Workshop (Continued) First Step: Specify the column. » Question: How should these specifications be implemented? Note: Look at the results. - Set the distillate flow rate to be equal to the mass flow rate of HCl in the feed. 2001 .

All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 388 ©1998 AspenTech. - Apply the guidelines presented in this section Septiembre 12. » Question: How should these specifications be implemented? Note: You may have some convergence difficulties.RadFrac Convergence Workshop (Continued) Second step: VCM in distillate and HCl in bottom are much too high! - Allow only 5 ppm of HCl in the residue and 10 ppm VCM in the distillate. .

88 bar COL mass reflux ratio:0. 18 bar. HCl 19.5%wt VCM 33.0%wt FEED DIST max 10 ppm VCM 17.RadFrac Convergence Workshop (Continued) Use the PENG-ROB Property method flow : HCl in feed 130000 kg/h 50 C.24 bar max 5 ppm HCl When finished.5%wt EDC 47. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 389 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.BKP (step 2) Septiembre 12.7 feed on stage 17 BOT 18.BKP (step 1) and VCMHCL2. save as filename: VCMHCL1.

Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 390 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

391 . All rights reserved.Reach Your Potential True Vinyl Chloride Monomer (VCM) Workshop Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech.

1000 kmol/hr of pure EDC feed enters the reactor at 20 C and 30 bar. The hot gases from the reactor are subcooled by 10 degrees before fractionation. In the first column. Two distillation columns are used for the purification of the VCM product. anhydrous HCl is removed overhead and sent to the oxy chlorination unit. VCM product is removed overhead and the bottoms stream containing unreacted EDC is recycled back to the furnace. non-catalytic process involving the pyrolysis of 1. Use the RK-SOAVE Property Method. Overheads from both columns are removed as saturated liquids. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 392 ©1998 AspenTech. EDC conversion in the reactor is maintained at 55%.VCM Workshop Objective: Set up a flowsheet of a VCM process using the tools learned in the course. In the second column.2-dichloroethane (EDC) according to the following reaction CH2Cl-CH2Cl HCl + CHCl=CH2 The cracking of EDC occurs at 500 C and 30 bar in a direct fired furnace. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12. The HCL column is run at 25 bar and the VCM column is run at 8 bar. Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) is produced through a high pressure. .

VCM Workshop (Continued) CH2Cl-CH2Cl EDC 1000 kmol/hr EDC 20C 30 bar HCl + CHCl=CH2 HCl VCM FEED RStoic Model RadFrac Model Heater Model COOLOUT COL1 VCMOUT HCLOUT RadFrac Model REACTOUT CRACK RECYCIN Pump Model 500 C 30 bar EDC Conv.969 Distillate to feed ratio = 0. All rights reserved.082 Distillate to feed ratio = 0. . 2001 ® When finished.354 Feed enters above stage 8 Column pressure = 25 bar PUMP 30 bar outlet pressure RECYCLE 10 stages Reflux ratio = 0.5 bar pressure drop VCMIN COL2 15 stages Reflux ratio = 1. save as filename: VCM. = 55% QUENCH 10 deg C subcooling 0.550 Feed enters above stage 7 Column pressure = 8 bar Use RK-SOAVE property method Septiembre 12.BKP Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 393 ©1998 AspenTech.

Quench cooling duty ________ 3. Concentration of VCM in the product stream ________ Part B: The conversion of EDC to VCM in the furnace varies between 50% and 55%. . Use the sensitivity analysis capability to generate plots of the furnace heat duty and quench cooling duty as a function of EDC conversion. Furnace heat duty ________ 2. Septiembre 12. What are the values of the following quantities? 1. Condenser and Reboiler duties for COL2 ________ ________ 5. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 394 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.VCM Workshop (Continued) Part A: With the help of the process flow diagram on the previous page. set up a flowsheet to simulate the VCM process. Quench outlet temperature ________ 4.

Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 395 ©1998 AspenTech.

Reach Your Potential True ActiveX Automation Objective: Introduce ActiveX Automation Capabilities in Aspen Plus Aspen Plus References: • User Guide. Chapter 38. Using the Aspen Plus ActiveX Automation Server Introduction to Aspen Plus ® ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. 396 .

ActiveX Server Third level is programming against the software using a macro language. All rights reserved. The language demonstrated is Visual Basic for Applications using Excel97 as the interface. . • Septiembre 12.Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) .Copy/Paste . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 397 ©1998 AspenTech.Windows Interoperability • Three Levels .

Manipulate Flowsheet Graphics Can . .Add Unit Operation Blocks .Perform Run Control • Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 398 ©1998 AspenTech.Capabilities of Automation • Cannot .Read Output Results .Change Input Specifications . All rights reserved.Add Streams .

*.bkp Aspen Plus Backup File .*. then SaveAs.inp Aspen Plus Input File . All rights reserved.*.. Reinitialize. load pfdtut..bkp.*. • Septiembre 12.apw Aspen Plus Document .bkp Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 399 ©1998 AspenTech.apt Aspen Plus Template For this demonstration. 2001 ® .Aspen Plus Simulation File • • Cannot use Automation to Add Blocks/Streams so starting point must be an existing Aspen Plus Simulation file Can use any of the following file types . ActiveXDemo1.

.Run Simulation Septiembre 12.Close Aspen Plus Simulation .Automation Demonstration 1 • Objective: Create an Excel Workbook that performs the following .Open Aspen Plus Simulation . All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 400 ©1998 AspenTech.

Steps to Create Workbook • Open Excel . All rights reserved.Select Reference to Aspen Plus Place/Modify Controls Add Additional Text to Workbook Program General Declarations Write Code into Subroutines and Control Events • • • • Septiembre 12.Setup Excel for VBA Programming . . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 401 ©1998 AspenTech.

All rights reserved.Select Tools/Macro/Visual Basic Environment (VBE) Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 402 ©1998 AspenTech.Select View/Toolbars/Control Toolbox Open the VBA programming environment .Setup Excel for VBA Programming • • • Open a New Excel Workbook Add the “Control Toolbox” Toolbar .

use Browse button to find ..Select Reference to Aspen Plus • • • • • Make the VBE the active window Select Tools/References Look for “ASPEN PLUS GUI 10.. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 403 ©1998 AspenTech.\APUI\xeq\happ.0-1 Type Library” If not found.tlb Select reference by clicking the check box and pressing “OK” to complete the task and close the dialogue box Septiembre 12.. . All rights reserved.

It will change to crosshairs. Septiembre 12.Repeat above for cell G4. 2001 ® .Place/Modify Controls (1 of 6) • • • Make the Excel Workbook the active window Change the Workbook to Design Mode by pressing the “Design Mode” button on the Control Toolbox toolbar Add 3 Command Buttons to the Workbook .Select the Command Button from the Control Toolbox toolbar . All rights reserved. Click the upper left corner of cell G2 .Move the cursor on to the Workbook. G6 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 404 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 405 ©1998 AspenTech.Select the Check Box from the Control Toolbox toolbar . All rights reserved.Place/Modify Controls (2 of 6) • Add 1 Check Box to the Workbook .Place the control on the upper left corner of cell D2 The Workbook should look something like this • Septiembre 12. .

click your Right Mouse button (for right-handed people). All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 406 ©1998 AspenTech. . Select Properties from this menu. This will display the Properties window Septiembre 12.Place/Modify Controls (3 of 6) • • • Select any of the controls by clicking on it to make the small boxes appear around the edge With the cursor still over the control. This will open a pop-up menu.

All rights reserved.Place/Modify Controls (4 of 6) • • Change the properties of the controls using the info in the table below Change the control displayed in the property window by selecting the control on the workbook or changing the selection on the top of the property window Property Name Caption Name Caption Name Caption Name Caption Control CommandButton1 CommandButton2 CommandButton3 CheckBox1 Value cmd_OpenSimulation Open Simulation cmd_CloseSimulation Close Simulation cmd_RunSimulation Run Simulation chk_IsVisible Make Visible Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 407 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 408 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. . the Properties window for the Check Box should look something like this Septiembre 12.Place/Modify Controls (5 of 6) • When finished.

All rights reserved.Place/Modify Controls (6 of 6) • The Workbook should look something like this Septiembre 12. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 409 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 410 ©1998 AspenTech. . All rights reserved.Add Additional Text to Workbook (1 of 2) • Use the table to add text to the workbook Size/Effect 16pt/Bold 12pt/Bold Cell A1 A4 Text Aspen Plus/ActiveX Demonstration Simulation File Septiembre 12.

. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 411 ©1998 AspenTech.Add Additional Text to Workbook (2 of 2) • The Workbook should look something like this Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved.General Declarations • • • • Make the VBE the active window Select Insert/Module to create a new Basic module Insert the following code into the module All text in lines that start with a ‘ are comments and do not need to be typed Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 412 ©1998 AspenTech. .

. All rights reserved.Code Subroutine • • • Make the VBE the active window Add the following code into the Basic Module below the General Declarations written before Note: For this and all following code. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 413 ©1998 AspenTech. the code IS CASE-SENSITIVE Septiembre 12.

The If-Then lines are what needs to be typed Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. make the workbook the active window then double click on the checkbox. make the workbook the active window. and then Double-Click on the control • To code the event below. . make sure the Design Mode button is pressed.Code Control Events (1 of 4) • To code the specific control. The VBE will open and the cursor will be inside the following paragraph. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 414 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 415 ©1998 AspenTech. .Code Control Events (2 of 4) • Code the following control event Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.

.Code Control Events (3 of 4) • Code the following control event Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 416 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 417 ©1998 AspenTech.Code Control Events (4 of 4) • Code the following control event Septiembre 12. . All rights reserved.

Septiembre 12.Code Workbook_BeforeCloseEvent (1 of 2) • If you exit the workbook without closing the loaded simulation. 2001 ® .Change the drop down controls to read “Workbook” (left selection) and “Before_Close” Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 418 ©1998 AspenTech. do the following steps . This will create a window in the code area titled “filename ThisWorkbook (code) . the simulation will still exist. All rights reserved.Double click on “This Workbook” from the explorer type view on the left side of the VBE. To prevent this.Make the VBE the default . It will still be in memory but not accessible.

xls Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 419 ©1998 AspenTech.Code Workbook_BeforeCloseEvent (2 of 2) • Add the following code • Save the file as ActiveXDemo1. All rights reserved. .

All rights reserved.Running Demonstration • Make the Workbook the active window • Press the Design Mode button so it is inactive • Press the “Open Simulation” button . it is the starting point for the Workshop Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 420 ©1998 AspenTech.Find ActiveXDemo1.bkp on your disk • Press the “Run Simulation” button .The program will execute • The Aspen Plus GUI can be made Visible/Not Visible using the check box • ® Save the workbook. 2001 . Septiembre 12.

.Add subroutines in the VBE . All rights reserved.Demonstration of Input/Output • • Objective .Modify the code in the Run Command Button Septiembre 12.Modify workbook to accept input and display output results after running simulation The modifications will do the following: .Add additional text to workbook . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 421 ©1998 AspenTech.

All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 422 ©1998 AspenTech.Add Additional Text to Workbook (1 of 2) • Use the table to add text to the workbook Size/Effect 12pt/bold 12pt/bold 10pt/normal 10pt/normal 10pt/normal 10pt/normal Cell A7 D7 A8 D8 B9 E9 Text Input Values Output Values Stream 2 Total Flow Rate Block B2 Heat Duty lbmol/hr MMBtu/hr Septiembre 12.

2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 423 ©1998 AspenTech. .Add Additional Text to Workbook (2 of 2) • The Workbook should look something like this Septiembre 12. All rights reserved.

Aspen Plus Variable Explorer (1 of 2) • • • • • Aspen Plus provides a way to find the syntax to specific variables in a simulation Make a copy of the Aspen Plus simulation file and use the Variable Explorer on the copy Found Under Tools/Variable Explorer All Numeric Input/Output Variables are found under Root/Data/[Streams or Blocks] When you find the variable of interest. Septiembre 12. 2001 ® . All rights reserved. the syntax is displayed in the “Path to Node” window. This text can be copied into your program environment Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 424 ©1998 AspenTech.

Aspen Plus Variable Explorer (2 of 2) • The Variable Explorer will look something like this when the proper path to the Block B2 Heat Duty is selected Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 425 ©1998 AspenTech.

.Code Subroutines • Add subroutines to Module 1 in the VBE Septiembre 12. All rights reserved. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 426 ©1998 AspenTech.

2001 .Modify Run Button Code • Change the Run Button code to the following • ® Save the file as ActiveXDemo2.xls Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 427 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.

You may have to clear dialogue boxes caused by the Reinit command The simulation will run and the results will be displayed in cell D9 Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 428 ©1998 AspenTech. 2001 . Septiembre 12.Running Demonstration • Make the Workbook the active window • Press the Design Mode button so it is inactive • Press the Open Simulation Button and load ActiveXDemo1. All rights reserved.xls • • • ® Change to cell A9 and enter a value between 100-101 Press the Run Simulation Button .

All rights reserved. .Add code and text to Workbook to perform the following • Input Temperature of Block B2 (use cell A11. keep between 350-450 F) • Output Total Flow Rate of Stream 9 (use cell D11) Septiembre 12.Automation Workshop • Objective . 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 429 ©1998 AspenTech.

.Workshop Answer (1 of 2) • The Workbook should look something like this Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 430 ©1998 AspenTech. All rights reserved.

2001 . All rights reserved. Septiembre 12.Workshop Answer (2 of 2) • Modified Subroutines • ® Save the file as ActiveXWorkshop.xls Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 431 ©1998 AspenTech.

stream reports) .More Complex input (changing multiple specifications.More Complex Output (RadFrac profiles. All rights reserved. changing composition of streams) Covered in “ActiveX Automation of Aspen Plus” course • Septiembre 12. 2001 ® Introduction to Aspen Plus Slide 432 ©1998 AspenTech. .Changing units .Additional Topics • • Error Checking is not included in example Further capabilities .

You're Reading a Free Preview

Descarga
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->